Home

NT20S

1. Reference Word n 1 n 2 Memory table Copy source gt Screen switch setting A _ Copy memory Copy source number Ao Y table setting Copy destination number A Copy destination i for display PT status contro seting Write a memory table number etc to the copy memory table setting area in the PT status control area in the PC memory Data will be copied between the memory tables in the NT20S and the displayed value will change accordingly This procedure is convenient to switch predetermined values or character strings according to the situation By preparing several units of contents various contents can be displayed by switching them to suit the situation Copy memory table setting of the PT status control area 15 14 1312111098 765 4 3 2 1 0 Bit T T 0 Copy source memory table 3 digit BCD Copy memory table setting Copy type Copy destination memory table 3 digit BCD i Copy type 0 Copy between the character string memory tables 1 Copy between the numeral memory tables Copy source and destination memory table numbers 000 to 127 e Available allocation words The PT status control area can be allocated to the following PC areas Symbol C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated ESE Internal Special Relay MSN Internal Special Relay Le Oe pana OY COMETA O LIN UN ao June O o O OK x NG
2. e Communication conditions Communication conditions are set when a support tool is started Reference To make a connector cable refer to Appendix H Making the Cable for Connection to the Support Tool page 268 31 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 4 2 4 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Connect the NT20S ST121 EV3 to an OMRON PC by the host link method To connect the NT20S to a PC using the host link method the NT20S Comm Type memory switch must be set to Host Link For details on the Comm Type setting refer to Selecting the Host Communication Method page 78 2 4 1 Compatible PCs Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the host link function built in Inthe C200HX HG HE series there are CPU units that can support host link connec tions by installing an expansion communication board When making a connection check the series and model of the PC to which the connection is being made and the type of host link unit that is installed The follow ing is a list of the PCs that can be connected to the NT20S via a host link Units with Built in Host Link Function PC Series CPU Units Connectable Using an Connectable to Host Link Unit CPU Unit Expansion Communication Board C20H C28H C40H C60H C120 C200H C120 LK201 V1 C500 F C1000H C2000 H C200H LK201 V1 EA C200H C200HS CPU21 E C200HS CPU23 E C200H LK201 V1 CE PO E
3. Characteristics of C200H direct communication C200H direct communication has the following characteristics e High speed communication is possible through an I O cable easily connected to the CPU unit e Data can be written to the PC memory area in bit units This means that the unused bits of words allocated to touch switches can be used for other applications for example lamp allocations Since the C200H direct communication function is compatible with the host link the NT20S screen data and PC programs for host link direct connection can also be communicated by C200H direct communication without alteration A Caution With systems in which the user program operates in accordance with the PC cycle time since there is some fluctuation in the PC cycle time the system operation may not be consistent and this should be born in mind when designing the system 14 Communications with PC by Direct Connection Section 1 5 1 5 Communications with PC by Direct Connection 1 5 1 Functions of the Allocated Bits and Words When using an NT20S ST121 EV3 with the direct connection function host link or NT link NT20S ST122 V1 C200H direct communication the elements dis played on the NT20S and the NT20S status can be allocated to the bits and words of the PC By changing the contents of the bits and words the NT20S can be con trolled by the PC Itis also possible to send data to the PC by pressing t
4. Numerical value incremented by one Numerical values cannot be set in thumbwheel type numeral setting fields by using numeric keys Changing the sign In settings with a sign display touching the incrementing decrementing keys at the digit where the sign is displayed will change plus to minus and minus to plus Upper lower limit check When using Ver 2 and later versions of the direct connection function an upper lower limit check is executed when the incrementing decrementing keys are pressed If the input numerical value is outside the valid range the data in the numeral memory table before the key was pressed is redisplayed and not notified to the host However with thumbwheel type numeral setting ifthe situation is such that with an upper limit of 1n n and a lower limit of Om m where n and m are the values of each digit n n lt m m itis not possible to carry digits upward or downward Example When the upper limit value is 1200 and the lower limit value is 201 if the initial value has three digits the value can be changed within the range 201 to 999 and if the initial value has four digits it can only be changed within the range 1000 to 1200 147 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 This is because if an attempt is made to change the leftmost digit from O to 1 or from 1 to O an upper lower limit value check is always performed In order to avoid this either set the values so t
5. 4 251 WINO iada eei inde d wade aces 257 264 Write character string memory table 205 X XON XOFF sees ees wane ier aay OE O bes 83 Z Zero SUPPFeSS 0 es 128 Revision History NT 20S Programmable Terminal Operation Manual A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No VO20 E3 2 f Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code V020 E1 1 September 1994 Revised content Original production V020 E1 2 June 1995 Overall revision by addition of a new model V020 E1 3 May 1997 Overall revision by addition of a new model e Revisions due to addition of NT link 1 N e Revisions due to addition of new model NT20S ST16_ m addition of an applicable PC CDM1 addition of explanations and correction of errors V020 E1 4 August 1997 Correction of errors V020 E3 2 May 1998 Revisions made to version V020 E1 4 Section 1 3 NT Link 1 N Systems replaced graphic Changed Heading in Section 3 5 289 OMRON OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC 1 Commerce Drive Schaumburg IL 60173 847 843 7900 For US technical support or other inquiries 800 556 6766 OMRON CANADA INC 885 Milner Avenue Toronto Ontario M1B 5V8 416 286 6465 OMRON ON LINE Glo
6. a C200HX HG HE RS 232C cable End connection max 2 m RS 232C RS 422A RS 232C RS 422A converter unit converter unit RS 232C RS 422A RS 232C RS 422A lr NTALOOI T NTALOOI Y converter unit converter unit E f type NT ALOO1 type NT ALOO1 i ll T RS 422A a RS 422A A cable cable RS 232C cable RS 232C cable RS 232C cable max 2 m max 2 m max 2 m Total cable length 500 m 1 2 3 5 End connection ARARA End connection C200HX HG HE RS 232C cable max 2 m RS 232C RS 422A converter unit RS 232C RS 422A T eee converter unit E type NT AL001 E i RS 486 cable 485 cable RS 232C cable RS 232C cable RS 232C cable max 2 m max 2 m max 2 m NG End connection RS 232C RS 422A converter unit RS 232C RS 422A type NT ALOO1 converter unit T amano a type NT ALOO1 gt RS 485 cable Total cable length 500m 55 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 6 e RS 422A connection RS 422A at the PC side Mani RS 232C RS 422A RS 232C RS 422A converter unit converter unit RS 232C RS 422A type NT ALOO1 al NT AL001 converter unit C200HX HG HE End connection ON 2 ill End connection RS 422A cable E type N
7. Host Connections by RS 232C 2 0 ee eee i cr SECTION 3 Operation Flow by the System Menu 00 cece eee en eens Starting the NT20S Operation Modes and the System Menu 0 0 0 c cece cee eee eee Initializing Memory Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory SWITCHES a EEA Registering the Screen Data ooooooococoocconccncr rr Starting the Operation Various System SettidgS ssoi ss niana a ee eee ee eben eee beeen ene System Maintenance xiii xiv xiv xiv 21 22 27 31 32 45 49 58 63 65 66 67 68 72 75 86 90 91 99 vii viii SECTION 4 NT20S Functions and Operation 111 4 1 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data 0 eee eee ee eens 112 4 2 Outline Of Functions id a ved ated ed eee clad oleh nad ad Beet dai 118 4 3 Sereen Display ii e ted as etd dale tc 122 4 4 Memory Tables etica tdi ii nd ocd a ct aca tt ed Jags Susan leis cha 126 425 gt u Bar Graphs isis AS A AAA occa 129 AsO Vea ER RR 133 A 7 Touch Switches a a A Ae ate Gotta 136 425 Numetal Setting ca id Gk eee ava tae eee ia lal a Giese ad 140 SECTION 5 How to Use the Host Link NT Link 151 5 1 Overview of Direct Connection Operations 0 0 eee eee 152 5 2 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs 0 ee eee eee 163 5 3 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting 0 0 c
8. 1 L 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Bit 0 00 Item Controlled Screen display Note 1 Processing priority registration Note 2 Continuous buzzer Intermittent buzzer Backlight mode Note 1 The backlighting is on when the screen display bit is set to ON and off when the screen display bit is set to OFF Note 2 Priority registration is only valid when NT link 1 N is set The PC status control bits remain unchanged if the NT20S status is changed with the screen attributes or memory switches which means that the statuses of the PT status control bits do not match the actual status of the NT20S For example the buzzer may sound even though the setting for continuous buzzer bit 13 is OFP In this kind of case control the NT20S by using the PT status control bits 191 NT20S Status Control Section 5 4 e Screen display bit 15 The screen display bit is used to display and clear the screen to prevent burn in onthe CRT Set bit 15 to O OFF to clear the screen The backlight will also go OFF at the same time When the screen has been cleared the last displayed screen can be redisplayed either by turning Bit 15 ON or by pressing atouch switch The backlight will also light at the same time Note that if the screen is OFF by the backlight OFF or EL screen OFF function with Bit 15 ON 1 turn Bit 15 OFF 0 once and then turn
9. Production Line Status The NT20S displays real time information about the system and equipment Monitoring operating status etc Production Control 1994 1 25 Product NT20M NT600M Today s target 560 units 441 units Current Production 305 units 275 units achieved 54 5 63 0 Messages The NT20S warns of system or equipment failures and prompts the appropriate remedial action Alarm Assembly line B Positioning pin is defective Panel Switch Functions Setting touch switches on the NT20S allows workers to use the NT20S as an oper ating panel Production data input to the NT20S or the Host can be transmitted toa PC Electroplating Control Transport X a Clamp UnClamp Role and Operation of NT20S Section 1 1 1 1 1 Operations of NT20S Displays Screens The information to be displayed screen data can be created on a computer by using support tools and stored in the NT20S The screen data can be displayed on the NT20S in response to the instructions from a Host or touch switch operation Host T ae The screen data designated by instructions from Host or touch switch operation is displayed Receives Data from a Host The NT20S can be connected to the Host using the host link or NT link commu nication method or by using the RS 232C interface or C200H direct
10. 22 Description of Parts and Settings Section 2 1 Rear View Contrast control Lid for backlight replacement Use a fine flat blade screwdriver Clockwise The backlight unit is installed behind turns will increase the brightness this lid Warning label The NT20S ST122 V1 has the support tool connector and communication condition setting switches under this cover Reset switch Power input terminals The NT20S statuses are reset to the initial statuses by pressing this switch The screen data memory and the memory switch will retain the status even if this switch is pressed Connect the power to the NT20S at these terminals Host I F tool connector Connect the cable here from a PC Host or support tool On the NT20S ST122 V1 this connector is for connection to a host only 23 Description of Parts and Settings Section 2 1 2 1 2 Operation Status DIP Switch Settings Set the NT20S operation status with the DIP switches located in the bottom right corner on the rear side of the body GEE Switch Function SW2 1 Screen data forced initialize effective ineffective ON The NT20S will start in a special RUN mode in which the screen data memory is initialized When it is started the memory initial ization menu will be displayed For the initialization procedure refer to Section 3 4 Initializing Memory page 72 OFF The NT20S will start in normal RUN mode Sw2 2 Screen display language mod
11. 0 cee eee eee 193 Intermittent Sound o oooooooo o 93 125 Internal processing cece eee eee 252 K Key press sound 000 cee eee eae 91 L OD eA e Re eS Ee Lp has AET 251 LGD Pamel esis siecle meet 94 LSS ainia 41 42 43 47 Lamp and touch switch display Bit specification ooooooooomoo o 210 Lamp and touch switch display Number specification 210 Lamp and touch switch display status CNQUIFY 2 A eee tian ek 211 Lamp and touch switch display status TOSPONSE va eee eee eevee eee eee eae 211 Lamp bit control 0 02 c ee eee 97 LAMPS shawn a a 9 15 133 Lid for backlight replacement 23 E AEAEE N E E N AT autearecitt ca week 133 138 M Maintenance 6 cee eee eee eee 68 Maintenance mode 2 e eee 71 Making up a connecting cable 256 Mark data 2 2 5 2k ries pte ek erin Ok 237 Mark Sis ca cerdas male rd 9 119 127 Memory error 00 cece eee ees 107 Memory S Z isis eed 113 Memory switches 000 eee eee 75 Menu tree cuca cee aranaren iwana a 69 Momentary oeni ri eraka eee eens 181 Monitoring a a a a a a aa 16 More than one lamp can be lit in batch 134 283 N NT ALOO1 oaas naaa eee 262 NT 208 citar a edn ee REA E 2 NT20S has made a buzzer sound 72 NT link sii renns i egona 12 13 45 78 Names of partS 0 cece eee eee 2
12. Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Select Page down Key Press Sound ON Buzzer Sound ON Bk light Off 10min Automatic Reset Yes 97 Various System Settings Section 3 8 98 Data Bits 8bits Stop Bits 1bit Parity Check Even Flow Control RS CS Baud Rate 19200bps LMP Bit Control Enable Each time the LMP Bit Control touch switch is pressed the set ting option Enable alternates with Disable To set and quit the menu press the WRT amp EXIT touch switch To quit without set ting press Quit e When Disable is set the control of lamp display statuses by bits is not possible The lamps numbered 0 to 31 can be controlled only by specifying lamp numbers e When Enable is set lamp control by bits is possible This means that the lamps numbered 0 to 31 can be controlled by specifying either lamp numbers or bits However it is not possible to make lit flashing status selections by specifying lamp numbers the selection made when the screen data was created remains effective System Maintenance Section 3 9 3 9 System Maintenance The NT20S has th
13. 123456 270 Model List Appendix J APPENDIX J Model List Model Specification CCC NT20S ST121 EV3 Host link NT link Blue mode display Beige NT20S ST121B EV3 Black NT20S ST161 EV3 Host link NT link Monochrome mode display Beige NT20S ST161B EV3 Black NT20S ST122 V1 C200H direct communication Beige NT20S ST122B V1 Black NT20S ST128 RS 232C Blue mode display Beig NT20S ST128B NT20S ST168 RS 232C Monochrome mode display NT20S ST168B Host Link Unit a Sean JO ApicaDie ro C120 LK201 V1 e Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series e Type mounted to a CPU C120 C200H C500 F C1000H C2000 H C200H LK201 V1 e Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series e Type mounted to C200H base C200H S HE HG HX C500 LK201 V1 Features a connector for RS 232C RS 422A connections C series switchable type C500 F C1000H C500 LK203 Type mounted to C500 base C2000 H CV500 LK201 e Features a connector for RS 232C connections and a CVM1 CV series connector for RS 232C RS422A connections CV500 switchable type CV1000 e Type mounted to base for CVM1 CV use CV2000 CVM1 271 Model List Appendix J CPUs For Connection Via a Host Link Mer een JO PO pe C20H C28H C40H C60H Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections CPM1 10CDR Connect an RS 232C adapter to the peripheral port C series CPM1 20CDR CPM1 CPM1 30CDR CQM1 CPU21 E Features a 9 pin connector for
14. Operation 1 Connect the NT20S to a PC in which the support tool has been installed and turn on the power to the NT20S 2 Turn ON the computer and start up the support tool 3 Enter the Transmit Mode by operating the menu of the NT20S as mentioned below Select Transmit Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode The transmit mode is estab TRANSMIT MODE lished When using an NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 the support tool mode setting will be displayed on the bottom line of the screen as shown in the figure to the left nothing is dis played here on the screen of the ABORT Tool Mode NT20S NT20S ST128 4 Select a screen data to be transmitted to the NT20S in the File Selection screen of the support tool and press the Send key 5 The NT20S will display the following screen when the screen data is being transmitted TRANSMIT MODE Tool PT Screen Data 0 KB ABORT Tool Mode NT20S 88 Registering the Screen Data Section 3 6 6 When the screen data transmission is completed the support tool will display the following screen Data successfully transmitted Hit any key to continue 7 Press any key on the support tool to return to the File Selection screen 8 Pressing the ABORT touch switch in the Transmit Mode screen of the NT20S will exit the Transmit Mode and enter the RUN Mode Note Press the
15. Data Memory 1 0 CHECK MENU Quit _ LCD Display LED Check Comm Check Buzzer Touch Switch Data Memory Press TEST START SCREEN DATA MEMORY CHECK Pressing Cancel will cancel Caution the memory check This test will destroy the Screen Data TEST System Maintenance Section 3 9 3 9 2 The screen memory check will start While the screen memory is checked the Memory checking message will be displayed e If the memory check has been normally completed the Memory is OK mes sage will be displayed e To quit the memory check press the Cancel touch switch The NT20S will en ter the I O CHECK MENU e Ifthe Memory error message is displayed the screen data memory may have been used up to its service life or there may be a hardware fault In that case initialize the screen data memory and check the memory again If the same error message is displayed again consult the OMRON Service Center Checking the PT Setting Display the NT20S settings by using the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select PT Setting MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch 107 System Maintenance NT20S
16. MAINTENANCE MENU Quit y DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch y MEMORY SW MENU Comm Type Key Sound Buzzer Sound Bk light Off Tool Mode MEMORY SW MENU Automatic Reset Baud Rate 1 2 Host Link OFF OFF None NT20M 2 2 No 9600bps Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Select Page If the host link is not selected press the Comm Type touch switch and select Host link Each time the Baud Rate touch switch is pressed the set ting option alternates between 9600 bps and 19200 bps To set and quit the menu press the WRT amp EXIT touch switch To quit without set ting press Quit 79 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC Host with Memory Switches Section 3 5 3 5 3 80 Selecting Unit Numbers NT20S ST121 EV3 only When using NT20S ST121 EV3 with the NT link 1 N communication method set unit numbers When using NT link 1 N unit numbers are used to identify each of the multiple PTs connected to a single PC port Set a different unit number for each of the PTs connected to the port The unit numbers that can be set differ in accordance with the type of host PC as follows C200HE Unit Nos 0 to 3 C200HG C200HX Unit Nos 0 t
17. Note Use the same condition settings as set for the host It is recommended that the highest baud rate possible is selected for both the host and the NT20S For details on lamp bit control refer to Section 3 8 Various System Settings on page 91 83 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC Host with Memory Switches Section 3 5 3 5 5 Selecting the Automatic Reset Function The Automatic Reset memory switch is used to set whether or not the commu nication is automatically reset after the occurrence of a communication error The factory setting has been made at No Select the baud rate of the communication with the PC by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Select Page MEMORY SW MENU 1 2 Comm Type Host Link Key Sound OFF Buzzer Sound OFF Bk light Off None Tool Mode NT20M 84 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC Host with Memory Switches Section 3 5 Each time the Automatic Re MEMORY SW MENU 2 2 set touch switch is pressed the Automatic Reset No setting option Yes alternates Baud
18. Section 3 4 MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch INITIALIZE MEMORY MENU Quit Init Screen Initialize Screen Memory No direct information is set Use the Support Tool to set the PT Control Area and PT Notify Area Select Init Memory Select Init Screen Select Yes The screen data memory is ini tialized During the initialization the Initializing message will be displayed If No is selected the memory initialization will be canceled and the NT20S returns to the operation mode Example NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 Direct information is also initial ized Set the direct information with the support tool After initialization of the screen data memory the system enters the operation mode At this point nothing is displayed on the screen of the NT20S Return to the System Menu select the Transmit Mode and transmit the screen data from the support tool If the screen data cannot be initialized for any reason the message An Error Oc cur Initializing Memory is displayed 73 Initializing Memory Section 3 4 3 4 2 Initialization by Using the DIP Switch Forced Initialization Note Be sure to turn the power OFF before setting the NT20S DIP switch Set the DIP switch as follows to initialize the screen data memory Ope
19. Spare PT It is advisable to have a spare NT20S available to minimize system downtime in the event of an NT20S failure or if the screen display becomes difficult to read due to deterioration of the display unit Backlight When the backlight in the display is getting dim and the screen cannot be read eas ily replace the backlight The backlight can be replaced at the rear of the NT20S while it is mounted in an operation panel e Replaceable Backlight Model NT20S CFL01 239 Maintenance of the NT20S Section 7 3 e Guide to Backlight Replacement Under normal conditions it can be assumed that the backlight will need to re placed after about 20 000 hours However the life of the backlight does vary in accordance with the environment in which it is used and it should be replaced when it is getting dim and the screen is getting hard to read Replacing the Backlight Z WARNING Turn off the power before replacing the backlight Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock Operation 1 Switch the power to the NT20S off remove the screw from the backlight re placement cover using a Philips screwdriver and open the cover Then dis connect the backlight connector from the NT20S 3 Re install the backlight and connect its connector to the NT20S Close the cover and tighten the screw with a flat head screwdriver 240 Inspection and Cleaning Section 7 4 7 4 Inspection and Cleaning Clean and inspect the NT20S regularl
20. e Character display Characters of various sizes can be displayed Characters can flash or be highlighted e Figure display Straight lines circles and other graphic figures can be displayed e Memory data display Contents of the character string memory table and the numeral memory table can be dis played The memory table contents can be changed from the PC Host e Bar graph display Bar graphs corresponding to the contents of the numeral memory table can be displayed e Lamp display Lamps which turn on or flash as controlled by the Host can be displayed Functions Related to the Data Input e Input by the touch switch Data can be input by simply touching the screen e Numeric setting function The touch keys can be assigned with numeric val ues so that the numeric values can be input at the operation site and sent to the PC Host Other Functions e Buzzer A built in buzzer can be used e Communications with a PC By connecting the NT20S with a PC using the host link NT link C200H or RS 232C communication method data can be received from the host and touch switch status information can be sent to the host e System function The system setting and maintenance can be executed by using the Sys tem Menu on the screen e Screen data creation The screen data can be created by using support tools on the computer and stored in the unit e Unrestricted screen display When the NT20S is connected to
21. e SW2 3 Switch to the System Menu enabled disabled is set to OFF enabled e SW2 1 Screen data forced initialize Yes No is set to No ineffective For the DIP switch settings of the unit refer to the DIP switch settings page 24 3 2 1 Changing the System Settings etc Procedure Note Follow the procedure below to change the system settings or screen data con tents 1 Turn ON the power to the NT20S The NT20S will enter the RUN mode and the start up screen will be displayed The start up screen varies according to registered screen data 2 Press appropriate touch switches to display the System Menu and change system settings For the method for calling the System Menu refer to the Op erations with the System Menu page 70 If the NT20S has failed to start up normally an error message is displayed or no screen is displayed memory needs to be initialized For the memory initializing procedure refer to Section 3 4 Initializing memory page 72 67 Operation modes and the System Menu Section 3 3 3 3 Operation Modes and the System Menu 3 3 1 68 The NT20S operates in either RUN Transmit or Maintenance mode The op eration modes can be switched by using the System Menu System Menu and the Operation Modes Select an operation mode by pressing the corresponding touch switch in the Sys tem Menu The operation modes with respect to the System Menu are related
22. my Display status O 30 Not lit normal display 1 81h Lit 2 32h Flashing inverse nn Lamp or touch switch 2 digit hexadecimal 00 to FF 0 to 255 Description The NT20S returns this command to report the lamp or touch switch number dis play status to the Host in response to the Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Enquiry Command referto 6 4 1 Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Enquiry sent from the Host Note Lamps 0 to 31 are reported as being lit when in the flashing inverse status 211 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 6 4 6 4 2 Notification of numeral setting input and touch switch status The following describes the commands for notifying the host when numeral setting is performed i e when the contents of a numeral memory table are changed by pressing a touch switch or when a touch switch is pressed when operating the NT20S When a numerical value is input by numeral setting the NT20S sends a Number Input Notify Command to the host The command sent differs depending on whether a 4 digit or 8 digit number is input When a touch switch is pressed the NT20S sends a Touch Switch Number Output Command or Touch Switch Bit Output Command to the host The command sent depends on the set screen attributes 4 digit Number Input Notify Format ESC E d d2 dg ny n2 ng Me gt CR 18 45 Lala a oe o d dod3 Numeral memory table addr
23. Close circuit After a circuit has been opened it can be used until it is closed again OPEN Opens the RS 232C circuit The Host communication conditions are also set Refer to 3 5 4 Setting RS 232C Communication Conditions PRINT Sends an instruction via the RS 232C circuit to the NT20S LINE INPUT Receives a command from the NT20S LINE INPUT is used when receiving input delimited by commas or double quotation marks CLOSE Closes the RS 232C circuit Refer to the Host s BASIC Manual for more details about the commands 201 RS 232C Interface Unit Communications Section 6 1 Operation by Operating Commands The operating commands display monitored data from the production line and messages to the factory workers They are also used for NT20S control and man agement The communication flow between the Host and NT20S differs according to the fol lowing three cases Message from Host to NT20S Host program NT20S operation A a e Message operating command A eee we Message to PT gt Process message Enquiry from Host to NT20S Host program NT20S operation ete A Yew Se Enquiry operating command Gy et Sp Awe ee Enquiry Receive command bees A A A a wee eee ee ee eee ee Response operating command Notification of Operation at NT20S to the Host Host program NT20S operation Notification operating command Operation by Terminal Commands The terminal commands allow th
24. HG and HE CPU units are indicated below e C200HE Up to 4 NT20S units per port unit Nos O to 3 e C200HG C200HX Up to 8 NT20S units per port unit Nos O to 7 50 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 6 Converter Unit Connector Specifications Theterminal block specifications ofthe RS 232C RS 422A converter unit are indi cated here For details on the method for making the connection cable refer to Making the Cable page 265 NT AL001 RS 422A terminal block specifications e Connected terminal block RS 422A terminal block M3 screws e Electrical characteristics Conform to EIA RS 422A e Signal direction Signal input and output is relative to the NT ALO01 Terminal Signal Direction Block Pin Signal Name Abbreviation No Output 8 Request to send CSA Request to send CSB a fsa fsa Send data SDB sceny AN 1 Functionalground The CSA and CSB signals are for special applications Output o Oo Oo RDB of Oo cae ee Ca Terminal Screws and Crimp Terminals Note The terminal screws are M3 screws Use M3 size crimp terminals Tighten the ter minal screws with a torque of 0 4 N m During wiring crimp terminals must be used for connections Recommended crimp terminals Fork Type Round Type 6 2mm or less 6 2mm or less O Recommended Wire Size Japan Solderless Terminal MFG 1 25 NSA Fork Y1 2
25. Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Each time the Tool Mode touch MEMORY SW MENU 1 2 switch is pressed the setting Comm Type Host Link option alternates between NT20S and NT20M Key Sound OFF The figure to the left shows the Buzzer Sound OFF y NT20S ST121 EV3 screen Bk light Off None Tool Mode NT20M To quit after setting the selected item press the WRT 8 EXIT touch switch To quit without setting press the Quit touch switch The NT20S will enter the RUN mode e When NT20M is set the NT20M compatible mode is established and the termi nal can be used as an NT20M e When NT208 is set the terminal can be used as an NT20S Various System Settings Section 3 8 3 8 5 Lamp Bit Control NT20S ST128 When using the NT20S ST128 using the RS 232C interface for communication with the host you can select whether lamp statuses are controlled by bit designa tion or not The factory setting for this function is Enable lamps numbered 0 to 31 controlled by bits Set the lamp bit control function by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU
26. Operation modes and the System Menu Section 3 3 Selecting the Menu Items Press touch a menu item on the screen to select the item Menu items allow to make the ON OFF selection or to call subsequent menu or screen Example 1 To call the Maintenance mode menu by pressing the Maintenance Mode on the System Menu screen Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch System Menu Items The System Menu items and the functions are as given below Quit The System Menu screen is cleared and the NT20S will return to the RUN mode Transmit Mode The Transmit Mode screen will be displayed to allow the trans mission of the screen data between the NT20S and the support tool For the transmission of the screen data refer to Section 3 6 Registering the Screen Data page 86 Maintenance Mode The MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed to allow the main tenance of the NT20S system Switching from the System Menu to the RUN mode The NT20S will exit the System Menu and switch to the RUN mode in the cases mentioned below e Selecting Quit in the System Menu e The screen touch switches is not pressed for over 10 seconds 71 Initializing Memory Section 3 4 3 4 3 4 1 72 Initializing Mem
27. Set the operating conditions with the PC System Setting functions when a CVM1 CV series host link unit is connected to the NT20S The PC system settings can be made directly from the peripheral tool LSS etc or the PC system setting information created with a peripheral tool can be transferred to the CPU The following describes the switch settings so as to enable the PC system set tings For the details of the PC system settings refer to the SYSMAC CVM1 CV Series Host Link User s Manual W205 E1 Communications port 1 RS 232C Communications port 2 RS 232C RS 422A 1 0 port selector switch RS 232C t RS 422A od o E ga Unit SW3 and SW4 Set these switches to 0 1 O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C CTS selection DIP SW2 and SW3 Set SW2 or SW3 to ON Set this always to 0V To use communication port 1 set SW2 To use commu nication port 2 set SW3 PC system setting DIP SW1 Set SW1 to OFP Communication is performed in accordance with the values set in the PC CPU special I O unit system set tings The initial values in the system settings are as follows Baud rate 9600 bps Communication mode Full duplex Parity Even Stop bit 2 bits Xon Xoff control Not performed Data length 7 bits 41 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 4 Connecting to a CPU e C series COOH CV
28. cece eee eee ene ne ene NT20S Internal Processing sousie no eae i ee E E eee E ene en aa Function Restrictions Depending on the Support Tool oo oooooommommo o Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host ooooooocooooo Making the Cable for Connection to the Support Tool ooooooooooommo o Connecting to an RS 232C RS 422A Converter Unit 1 1 oooooooooommo o Model List it eid cena anal Wek agen aes cepts a E aaa aap Option da ee a A TR aves ee ae PE Memory Ma py di a aaa SN ae o oa Special CHALACters enc e INDEX 00001 A AA AA AAA 243 243 248 249 251 252 255 256 268 269 271 276 278 279 281 Ix About this Manual This manual describes the basic functions and operation procedures of the NT series programmable ter minal NT20S its operations when connected to a PC or a Host and includes the sections described be low Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install and operate the NT series programmable terminal NT20S WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sec tions before attempting any of the procedures or operations given Section 1 describes
29. 1 FG Jill egies cra 2 2 2 SD sD O A 21 e SD 3 3 Peripheral device E E RD ol 4 O RD connector on PT ersonal O O R body 5 CS computer BS 5 al 5 7 6 DR cs O O cs 7 SG se O Lo sce FER es ners era 8 CD FG O Shielding 1 O FG 20 ER wire When making the connecting cable use the following recommended parts Name f w o o SSS E i XM2A 2501 25 pin manufactured by OMRON personal computer side onnector XM2A 0901 9 pin manufactured by OMRON PT side XM2S 2511 25 pin manufactured by OMRON personal computer side Connector cover XM2S 0911 9 pin manufactured by OMRON PT side AWG28x5P F aay IEVV SB Multiconductor shielded cable FUJIKURA Ltd able CO MA VV SB a A 5P x 28AWG Multiconductor shielded cable HITACHI Cable Ltd e For a 9 pin connector 1 CD A E 2 2 RD RD O O SD 3 3 Peripheral device s p l SD O 7 4 O RD connector on PT ersona O body 5 SG computer PS O E B 5 RS 6 DR cs O O cs 7 RS se O I O sq E cs Shielding 1 Fa 9 wire When making the connecting cable use the following recommended parts IN TI 9 pin manufactured by OMRON personal computer side 9 pin manufactured by OMRON PT side 9 pin manufactured by OMRON two AWG28 x 5P IEVV SB Multiconductor shielded cable FUJIKURA Ltd pu CO MA VV SB 5P x 28AWG Multiconductor
30. 204 ESC 0 m4 mo m3 m4 m m mzm4 Number of displayed screen 4 digit hexadecimal 0000 No display 0001 to 01FAy Screen 1 to 500 The specified screen is displayed on the NT20S when a screen number is sent from the Host with this command ESC x 1B 58 Enquires what number screen is displayed on the NT20S The NT20S returns the number of the displayed screen using the Screen Number Response Command refer to 6 2 Screen Number Response Memory Tables Section 6 3 Screen Number Response Format ESC Y m4 m2 ma CR 1B 59 sxs A f OD m m m3 Number of displayed screen 4 digit hexadecimal 000 to 1FAy 0 to 500 Description e The NT20S returns this command to report the currently displayed screen num ber to the Host in response to the Request Screen Number Command refer to 6 2 Request Screen Number sent from the Host e The new screen number is report to the Host with this command after the dis played screen is switch with the Stand alone functions screen switch function 6 3 Memory Tables This section explains the commands used for memory table operations To change the contents of a character string memory table use the Write Charac ter string Memory Table Command To change the contents of anumeral memory table use a Write Numeral Memory Table Command Note that different commands are used to write 4 digit and 8 digit n
31. 3 Create a PC program to write the contents of numerals and character strings to be displayed on the NT20S to the PC words e Important points when writing a character string If a character string to be written is smaller than allocated word x 2 fill up the vacant space with normal size spaces 20H If unnecessary characters are left in the area the character string will not be displayed correctly 169 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 Application Example of the Numeral Memory Tables Allocated to the PC Words 170 This example gives the procedure to directly display the contents of the words allo cated as the numeral memory tables in the PC memory The NT20S screen dis play will change as the contents of the PC word change e Support tool settings Allocate the memory as shown below by using the support tool Numeral memory table entry 1 DMOOOO allocated words 2 words Numeral memory table entry 2 DMO0002 allocated words 1 word Screen numbers to be created 1 and 2 Numeral memory Line 1 Qty 15289 Defects 23 table entry 1 8 digit input units units Numeral memory table entry 2 4 digit input e PC ladder program Create a PC ladder program as follows 25502 1 second clock 00100 DIFU 13 00100 INC 38 DMO0000 INC 38 DM0001 INC 38 DM000
32. 3 x 3 times enlargement 5 35H 4 x 4 times enlargement All text and marks sent after this command are displayed in the specified size The character string is specified with the Specify Displayed Characters Com mand refer to 6 6 Specify Displayed Characters The enlargement specified with this command remains valid until the screen dis play is switched or another enlargement is specified with the command The de fault enlargement is no enlargement 217 Terminal Commands Section 6 6 Normal Display Format ESC 1B 21 Description Cancels all display attribute settings inverse flashing flashing inverse for char acters and marks so that all characters are displayed as normal characters not inverse or flashing Set Inverse Display Format ESC 1B 22 Description Sets the display attribute to inverse so that all characters and marks sent subse quently are highlighted Other attributes remain unchanged Reference The Set Inverse Display Command is cancelled by the End Inverse Display Com mand or the Normal Display Command The setting with this command remains valid until the screen display is switched or another display attribute setting is made The default display attributes are settoa normal display when a screen is initially displayed Use this command with the Set Flashing Display Command refer 6 6 Set Flashing Display to produce a flashing inverse display En
33. 5300 5310 5320 5330 5340 5350 5360 5370 5380 5390 5400 5410 5420 5430 5440 5450 5460 5470 5480 5490 5500 5510 5520 5530 5540 5550 5560 5570 232 IF LV 1 THEN LY I 1 LOCATE LX LY PRINT SPACES 20 NEXT I SEL NO 0 GOTO SEL RET KY1 IF AS lt gt CHRS amp H1E AND A lt gt CHRS amp H1F THEN GOTO KY2 IF LV 0 AND SEL NO lt 5 THEN LY SEL NO IF LV 0 AND SEL NO gt 5 THEN LY SEL NO 1 IF LV 1 THEN LY SEL NO 1 COLOR 0 LOCATE LX LY PRINT CMNDS SECT NO SEL NO 0 IF AS CHRS amp HI1E THEN SEL NO SEL NO 1 ELSE SEL NO SEL NO 1 IF SEL NO 0 THEN SEL NO CMND SECT NO IF SEL NO gt CMND SECT NO THEN SEL NO 1 IF LV 0 AND SEL NO lt 5 THEN LY SEL NO IF LV 0 AND SEL NO gt 5 THEN LY SEL NO 1 IF LV 1 THEN LY SEL NO 1 COLOR 4 LOCATE LX LY PRINT CMNDS SECT NO SEL NO 0 GOTO KY IN KY2 IF AS lt gt CHRS amp HD THEN GOTO KY IN SEL RET COLOR 0 RETURN DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA SCREEN CONTROL MEMORY TABLE OPERATION LAMP TOUCH SWITCH OPERATION TOUCH SWITCH INPUT SYSTEM CONTROL CHARACTER SIZE CHARACTER DISPLAY ATTRIBUTE CHARACTER STRING DISPLAY FIGURE DISPLAY 2 Display specified screen ESC 0 Request screen number ESC X 4 Write character string memory table ESC B 4 digit write numeral table ESC C 8 di
34. Direct information Era a as a a When screen data transmission is in screen units if there is data other than screen data for example memory table or direct access changes transmit this data also When screen data is transmitted to an NT20S it is written into a free area of the memory without overwriting the existing data This means that if data transmis sion in screen units is performed frequently there will come atime when there is no more free area in the memory and further transmission is impossible If this hap pens transmit the data in file units to reorganize the contents of the NT20S memory Transmitting the Screen Data from the Support Tool Reference To transmit the screen data from the support tool to the NT20S connect the NT20S to the computer on which the support tool is being used and follow the pro cedure below When the screen data transmission is attempted the screen data memory in the NT20S is automatically initialized before new screen data is transmitted It is not necessary to initialize the screen data memory by using the menu before the screen data transmission The NT20S ST121 EV3 ST128 uses the same connector for screen data trans mission and connection to the Host If this connector is currently connected to the host disconnect the cable from it and connect it to the support tool personal com puter before attempting screen data transmission 87 Registering the Screen Data Section 3 6
35. E 6 2 7 z 8 2 SG 9 9 SG 9 pin connector Shielding wire 261 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host Appendix G Connecting an NT20S to an RS 232C 422A Converter Unit NT AL001 Connecting an RS 232C 422A converter unit enables the transmission distance to be made greater than 15 m up to 500 m NT ALOO1 Host ARIES a a E i RS 232C RS 422A oO Max 2m Max 500 m E el uum Reference When connecting the C200HX HG HE and an RS 232C RS 422A converter unit use a converter unit whose lot number is 15Y5 or later Converter units of lot numbers previous to 15Y5 cannot be con nected NT AL001 RS 232C connector specifications 9 pin type Electrical characteristics Comply with EIA RS 232C Signal direction Signal input and output is relative to the NT ALOO1 Connector ane Signal Name Abbreviation Gomesoronr Frame ground Fo Sendas SD S Signal Direction F S J iw ZIsIF L SARS eae il Request to send R O o Ola 4 4 gl Signal ground SG NT AL001 RS 422A terminal block specifications O zZ 0 Connected terminal block RS 422A terminal block M3 screws Electrical characteristics Comply with EIA RS 422A Signal direction Signal input and output direction is relative to the NT ALOO1 Si In gnal Direction p 2 s N AOOO 5 7 Reques
36. ESC m4 S1 S2 S3 dy do dg IT 1B 2F e see So A te fa sere hn eet m Type of memory table O 30 Character string memory table 1 314 Numeral memory table S1S283 Copy source memory table address 000 to 127 3 digit BCD djded3 Copy destination memory table address 000 to 127 3 digit BCD Description Copies the contents of the copy source memory table to the copy destination memory table The memory table contents are copied to a memory table of the sametype character string memory table to character string memory table or nu meral memory table to numeral memory table 207 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 6 4 6 4 6 4 1 208 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Reference This sectioin describes the commands for operating the lamps touch switches In order to change the display status lit flashing or unlit of a lamp or touch switch use the Lamp and Touch Switch Display Commands There are two such commands one for bit specification and the other for number specification The Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Enquiry Command is used to ascer tain the status of a lamp or touch switch When this command is executed the NT20S returns the Lamp Touch Switch Display Status Response Command When the status of an NT20S touch switch is changed for example by pressing it the Touch Switch Number Output Command is sent to the host When a numerical value is input by pressing a touch switc
37. NT20S ST161 please refer to the explanations for the NT20S ST121 e The only way in which NT20S ST168 differs from NT20S ST 128 is that the dis play is a monochrome liquid crystal display Functionally the NT20S ST128 and NT20S ST168 are absolutely identical and therefore if you are using an NT20S ST168 please refer to the explanations for the NT20S ST128 Difference between direct connection Ver 4 and Ver 5 Ver 5 of the direct connection function has the following additional functions in comparison with Ver 4 e Thumbwhee type setting possible with the numeral setting function e Upper and lower limit check can be set with the numeral setting function e The type of operation alternate set reset can be selected for touch switch in put notification e Indirect specification possible for numeral display and character string display functions Functions of NT20S Section 1 2 1 2 5 Displays The NT20S can display various kinds of elements such as characters lamps touch switches and bar graphs on a screen The screen data displayed on the NT20S are created by using support tools on a computer T Touch switches Characters Emergency character string gt gt stop Restart Numeric value Characters text ka Machine name NT20M DT131 Numeral table Production qty 137 units Bar graph
38. Numeric Key Allocations 144 displayed with the system attribute can be displayed If User is selected for Keypad during data creation on the numeral setting screen the numeric keys shown below are displayed TankA TankB Tank C The numeric keys are allocated to touch switches The numeric keys allocated to touch switches are specified when the touch switches are created The following numeric keys system keys can be used for numeral setting For details on how to create touch switches refer to 4 7 Touch Switches page 136 Touch Touch Touch Switch Numeric Switch Switch Number Number Number Menu 227 display 237 228 229 230 Numeric key number 227 is the system menu display key When the touch switches allocated as numeric keys and system keys on anumer al setting screen are pressed no notification is made to the PC This means that when using the NT20S ST128 RS 232C the touch switches numbered 227 to 255 cannot be used as normal touch switches on a numeral setting screen Numeral Setting Section 4 8 4 8 4 Using Numeric Keys To input numerical data by using numeric keys first select the numeral setting area into which the value is to be input then input the numerical value by pressing the appropriate numeric keys Selecting the Numeral Setting Area for Data Input Select the numeral setting area into which the numerical value is to be input by usin
39. ON 1 is periodically written into this bit In order to check whether the NT20S is operating normally or not write OFF 0 to this bit if it is ON 1 30 seconds later the NT20S is running and if it is OFF 0 the NT20S is stopped N Caution To ensure system safety be sure to periodically read the PT operating status bit from the host in order to ensure that the PT is always operating normally 196 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC Section 5 5 e Screen switch strobe flag bit 12 When the screen displayed on the NT20S is switched by a designation from the PC or by the standalone function the screen switch strobe flag comes ON 1 On notification to the PC it returns to the OFF 0 status For details on how the screen switch strobe flag is used see Notifying the Dis play Screen to the PC page 160 e Numeral setting strobe flag bit 11 When numerical data is input to a numeral memory table using the NT20S nu meral setting function the numeral setting strobe flag comes ON 1 On notifi cation to the PC it returns to the OFF 0 status For details on how the numeral setting strobe flag is used see Notification of Numbers to the PC page 188 5 5 2 Reading the NT20S Operating Statuses This section explains how to determine the status of the NT20S and ascertain its operating status To ascertain the operating status of the NT20S PT status is used The NT20S automaticall
40. T Effective when buzzer turned on Coordinate Specification with the Terminal Commands Error display The entire command is ignored if any point specified at coordinates X Y with the Terminal commands lies outside the screen If the automatic reset after communication memory switch of the NT20S is set to ON no message is displayed when a communication error occurs However time out errors are displayed 203 Screen Display Section 6 2 6 2 Screen Display This section describes the commands for switching the screen display of the NT20S and the commands for ascertaining the screen number of the screen cur rently displayed by the NT20S The displayed screen can be also switched by pressing a touch switch for which the screen number of the screen to be displayed has been registered For details on this method refer to Screen Switching Function on page 138 To change the NT20S screen use the Display Specified Screen Command To ascertain the screen number of the currently displayed screen use the Request Screen Number Command When this command is executed the NT20S returns the Screen Number Response Command When the currently displayed NT20S screen is changed by pressing a touch switch to which a screen number has been allocated the Screen Number Re sponse Command is automatically sent from the NT20S Display Specified Screen Format Description Request Screen Number Format Description
41. The display position and arrangement of the numeric keys are fixed On this screen only the types of numeric key shown in the figure below system keys are used Tank A TankB Tank C pom aman ena WA DA PA Wie UA When using the NT20S with the numeral setting attribute set to system apart from the numeric keys provided by the system the touch switches allocated to system keys ll 4 also have to be created system key function To enable input of hexadecimal values it is also necessary to create numeric keys A through F With the NT20S if the numeral setting attribute is set to system apart from the numeric keys prepared by the system the touch switches allocated to system keys ld 4 t have to be created System key functions page 139 e When the numeral setting attribute is user The display position and arrangement of the numeric keys can be set as required by allocating them to touch switches see page 125 hh OWL ie toe tan Do Oa 44M 90 When the numeral setting attribute is setto user numeric keys are created by using the control keys ofthe input key function In addition by using the char acter keys of the input key function the one byte characters Oto 9 and A to F can be used as numeric keys 143 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 Reference Even when the numeral setting attribute is setto user the same numeric keys as
42. This cover does not afford protection against all chemical agents e Since the cover is milky white it reduces the clarity of the display a little e This cover is intended to be affixed to the display in order to provide protection against chemical agents It will not provide protection against chemical agents that enter through the installation pan el or through the gap between the cover and the display 277 PC Memory Map Appendix L APPENDIX L PC Memory Map OMRON C Series Memory Map Link Relay Timer Count Ladder type 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0099 0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0511 C120 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0031 o000to 0127 0000 to 0051 C200H 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0099 0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0511 0000 to 1999 DM Area 0000 to 1999 C200HS C200HE 0000 to 6655 gt DHE 0000 to 0511 0000 to 0099 0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0511 5000 to 9999 C200HX C500 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0031 0000to0031 0000 to 0127 0000 to 0511 C1000H 0000 to 4095 C2000 H 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0099 0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0051 CQM1 0000 to 1023 0000 to 0019 CPM1 0200 to 0255 0000 to 0019 0000 to 0015 0000 to 0015 0000 to 0127 6144 to 6655 Flow type C500F 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0031 0000to0031 0000 to 0127 0000 to 0511 C1000HF 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0099 0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0511 0000 to 4095 OMRON CV Series Memory Map i
43. e Lamp Set the lamp number or allocated bit and display method O NEC Section 4 6 Lamps page 133 e Touch switch Set the touch switch number screen switching number allocated bits for control and notification and display method Ds das EEE Section 4 7 Touch Switches page 136 e Graph Set the numeral memory table number and display method ed OTT Section 4 5 Bar Graphs page 129 e Input setting Set numbers in the numeral memory table AAA AA a Section 4 8 Numeral Setting page 140 Edit screen quit Return to the Screen List To successively create or modify another screen select the screen number SAMPLE Scr list NT20S 4 S6KB No Status Comment Pabn Paue FG Displayl BLU Hari splay Help Message tat Specified Page Seace Mark Unmark HomelUrmark All S8 elMarkUnmark All Esc Select File Hist B Bee Fi Keys G Ext 102By te il Copy WeletagPrint Batt ibia Read Bronmntgetis BLo 0v I Mark H Next 11 E Z 3 4 5 6 T 3 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data Section 4 1 4 To the File Selection Enter filename to newly created screen data Return to the File List List NT20S V4 J6KB File Selection Title 1 11 Patel rave reation of New File or Line Input EsclExit to Main Menu rocess control backup roduction ty Check or Line Input rocess control backup roduction Qty Check o
44. gt AA 30 0 50 100 Stage 1 gt Stage 2 gt Stage 3 lt Lamps Characters text Characters and marks which do not need to be changed can be written directly to the screen Characters character string memory table Character strings stored in the character string memory table are displayed The display characters can be changed by changing the data stored in the character string memory table Numeric Values numeral tables Numbers stored in the numeral table are displayed The display numbers can be changed by changing the data stored in the numeral table Hexadecimal values can also be displayed Lamps Lamps are displayed as square or round frames and indicate the operating status They are controlled by the Host and can be lit reversed or made flash alternates normal with reversed displays Touch Switches Touch switches can be set anywhere on the screen Touching the screen at atouch switch location can switch the display display switch function or notify the Host notification function The touch switches can be lit or made flash by controlling from the Host in the same way as the lamps Numeric Keys These are the touch switches used to input numeric values Bar Graphs The bar graph extends and contracts in proportion to the data stored in the numer al table A percentage value can also be displayed simultaneously Marks Marks can be designed created and handled like characters by the user System Conf
45. oO oO poy a Special Characters Hex Digits ist 2nd ME 161 6 2 163 164 o al o alalzlalz a O o a N N wo Appendix M e Pe Pe ted ed foe he EE 179 18 181 182 4 o _ na C2 eer i a 1 Used as the prefix for mark data codes 2 bytes 280 A A E E Pao as gt Peps E 5 245 229 a e n N N O 00 n 2 o a o m gt qn ie N wo al N m O O N ww O m m m m m U W Nh Nm N U N al de m m mn m al D m mn qn a N al al INDEX A Allocatable bits and words 152 Allocated Dit mart rd ia aan ras 12 Allocated word 00 cece eee eee 12 Alternate so ces rey erty deta 181 Automatic reset 00 cece eee eee 238 Automatic reset function ooo o o o 84 B Backlight 0 00 e eee eee eee 193 239 Backlight OFF function 05 94 Backlight attributes o o oooooo 125 Backlight mode 0c cece eee eee 193 Bar Qrapns uni ad 129 Batch lighting 0 cece eee eee 134 Baud Tate ie ec test ieee eee bee ee detain bs 83 Before operating 0 cee eee eee 19 Bit input attributes 125 208 Bit touch
46. refer to Section 6 Using the RS 232C Control of the NT20S by a Host is executed by two kinds of commands supported by the RS 232C interface which is built into the NT20S Operation commands Operation commands are used to control the display and status of the running NT20S as well as to notify information They are used for purposes such as screen display data writing and enquiries Notification of the NT20S operation contents to the Host Terminal commands Terminal commands are used to use the NT20S as a display terminal of the Host When the NT20S is used as a display terminal it can display characters and fig ures in accordance with instructions given by the Host independently of the screens registered to the NT20S These commands are also used if unexpected problems occur 18 Before Operating Section 1 7 1 7 Before Operating Follow the procedure given below to start the system of the NT20S Check and change the Host settings e For the host link refer to page 36 and the manuals for the host link unit and peripheral tools For the NT link 1 1 refer to page 47 For the NT link 1 N refer to page 49 When using C200H di rect communication no settings are required For the RS 232C refer to page 63 and the manuals for the Host Y Connect to the NT20S Y NT20S Set the DIP switches page 24 Install to the op
47. 10CDR CPM1 20CDR CPM1 CPM1 30CDR CQM1 CPU41 E CQM1 CPU42 E CQM1 CPU43 E CQM1 CQM1 CPU44 E C200HS CPU21 E C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU31 E C200HS C series C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU32 E C200HE CPU42 E OE CE C200HE C200HG CPU33 E C200HG CPU43 E C200HG CPU43 E meee C200HG CPU63 E C200HG CPU53 E C200HG CPU63 E C200HX CPU34 E C200HX CPU44 E C200HX CPU44 E Benes C200HX CPU64 E C200HX CPU54 E C200HX CPU64 E cv500 CPU01 EV1 cvs00 CV series cv1000 CPU01 EV1 Cvt000 cv2000 CPU01 EV1 cv2000 CVM1 CPU01 EV CVM1 series CVM1 CPU11 EV CVM1 CVM1 CPU21 EV 45 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 1 Section 2 5 2 5 2 Connecting the NT20S N Caution Refer to the illustrations below to select the appropriate cable for the unit connec tors and connect the NT20S to the PC A host link connector cable can also be used To make a connector cable refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host page 256 e After connecting the communication cable always secure it with the screws Otherwise the cably may disconnect causing operation to fail e The cable s tensile load is 30 N Do not subject it to loads greater than this Otherwise a discontinuity may occur causing operation to fail Use a connector cable with a 9 pin connector on both ends to connect the NT20S to a PC with a 9 pin connector NT20S CPU unit SYSMAC C series PC CVM1 CV series PC
48. 127 Memory Tables Section 4 4 Numerals Which can be Displayed 128 Reference The power of expression of the screen can be increased by giving various attrib utes such as the enlarged or reverse display to the numerals of the numeral memory table The numeral attributes can be set in the edit screen when creating the screen data by using the support tool e Digits of the whole numbers 1 to 8 digits e Digits of the decimal fraction 0 to 7 digits e Character sizes Half normal e Enlarged display Double width double height x4 x9 x16 The characters enlarged tothe x4 scale or larg er are displayed with the outline automatically smoothed This function is called smoothing e Display attribute Normal reverse flashing reverse and flashing e Sign display setting e Decimal hexadecimal display setting e Zero suppress setting To display one numeral memory table on several different screens simultaneously the display attributes on such screens must be the same If there is discrepancies among the display attributes the numeral table may not be displayed correctly Zero suppress setting The numeral data are displayed in designated display areas as right aligned Ifthe number of digits of anumeral data is smaller than that of the display area number 0 s will be displayed at the vacant digits These 0 s will not be displayed if the zero suppress setting is made for Yes Bar Graphs Section
49. 138 System key function page 139 Numeral setting function NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 Host link NT link C200H direct communication page 188 NT20S ST128 RS 232C page 212 Touch Switch Attributes The following attributes can be set for touch switches e Display frame The area that will respond as a touch switch is displayed in the form of a frame as shown in the table below One of three types of frame standard 3 D and none can be selected Type of Display switch OFF Switch ON Frame gt O pom fo 137 Touch Switches Section 4 7 4 7 2 138 If none is selected only the touch switch s guide display message or nothing if there is none are displayed until a light or flash designation is sent from the PC Host or the touch switch is pressed e Inverse display on input It is possible to set a touch switch so that its display will be inverted when it is pressed e Lighting and flashing It is possible to specify whether the touch switch will be lit continuously or flash when the bit allocated to it is turned ON by the PC Host e Presence absence of a guide display A guide display message can be displayed at a touch switch location Screen Switching Function Note The NT20S has a function that allows screens to be switched by pressing touch switches on its screen rather than by designation from the PC Host This function is called t
50. 3 Application Example to Make the Lamp Light or Flash This example gives a procedure to control the bits to move a robot arm and turning the lamps ON and OFF e Support tool settings Allocate the memory as shown below by using the support tool Lamp 0 Word 000200 output bit to raise robot arm guide display message UP Lamp 1 Word 000201 output bit to lower robot arm guide display message DOWN Lamp 2 Word 000202 output bit to rotate robot arm counterclockwise guide display message C CLOCK Lamp 3 Word 000203 output bit to rotate robot arm clockwise guide dis play message CLOCK Lamp 4 Word 000204 output bit to clamp rotate robot arm guide display message CLAMP Lamp 5 Word 000205 output bit to unclamp rotate robot arm guide display message UNCLAMP Contents registered to the screen Lamp 0 to 5 A Raise Lamp 0 Line 1 Process 3 cower Lamp Counterclockwise Lamp 2 Clockwise Lamp 3 Conveyor Loading Robot Arm N P Unclamp Lamp 5 UP CLOCK C CLOCK DOWN e PC ladder program No PC ladder program is required to control the NT20S Only a program to con trol the robot arm movements is required e NT20S operation When the ladder program to control the robot arm is executed the lamps on the NT20S screen turn ON and OFF in synchronization with the robot arm move ment For example lamp 0 lights when t
51. 3 5 2 Selecting the Host Link Communication Speed NT20S ST121 EV3 only 79 3 5 3 Selecting Unit Numbers NT20S ST121 EV3 only 0 000000 0008 80 3 5 4 Setting RS 232C Communication Conditions NT20S ST128 0 82 3 5 5 Selecting the Automatic Reset Function 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 84 3 6 Registering the Screen Data ca ia a a i E a o 86 3 7 Starting the Operation 0 0 cece E r E 90 3 8 Various System Settings coi reris e ee i e a ena ia a ere aaa a ee a e e KT c ai 91 3 8 1 Setting the Key Press Sound 0 e a cece eee eee a E aoa 91 3 822 Using the BUZZ aibaoe arria e a dd a 92 3 8 3 Backlight OFF Function 1 0 0 0 0 cece cece eee ene ne eae 94 3 8 4 Support Tool Mode Setting NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 Only 95 3 8 5 Lamp Bit Control NT20S ST128 1 0 0 cece nee eee 97 3 9 System Maintenance 99 32921 PO CHECK AAA oth aad hess AA penetra gate gen dun uct Sey Mb seiueend Te aaa a end AAE 99 3 9 2 Checking the PT Setting eise etatene ec o een ene eee 107 3 9 3 Checking the NT20S DIP Switch Settings 0 eee eee eee eee 109 65 Operation Flow by the System Menu Section 3 1 3 1 Operation Flow by the System Menu Follow the procedure below when using the NT20S for the first time or when changing the system Create the Screen Data Create the screen data to be displayed on the NT20S by using a support tool For the screen data creation r
52. 4 5 4 5 Bar Graphs The contents of the numeral memory tables of the NT20S can be displayed as bar graphs as well as numeral data This section describes the bar graphs which can be displayed In order to change the data displayed in a bar graph the contents of its numeral memory table have to be changed For details on how to update the data of a currently displayed bar graph refer to Upgrading Bar Graphs Changing the Contents of Allocated Words on page 177 and 4 digit Write Numeral Memory Table on page 206 4 5 1 Bar Graph Functions Bar Graph Attributes The bar graph function displays a value in a bar graph form as a percentage to the specified value according to the contents of a numeral memory table Up to 50 bar graphs can be registered in one screen Reference table The numeral memory table used as the reference for the bar graph display can be set The support tool has the direct and indirect options for the reference method of the numeral memory table However the NT20S recognizes the direct meth od only The bar graph display cannot use hexadecimal numbers If hexadecimal num bers are set in the reference numeral memory table the bar graph cannot be displayed Use caution not to write hexadecimal numbers except the minus sign F to the reference numeral memory table The following attributes can be set with the NT20S for the bar graph display e Position and size The dis
53. A CAUTION Do not attempt to take the PC apart and do nottouch any internal parts while the power is being supplied Doing either of these may result in electrical shock Turn offthe power before replacingthe backlight Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock If the DIP switch settings have been changed when the NT20S is powered reset the power to the NT20S The changes with the DIP switches become effective only after the power supply is reset With systems in which the user program operates in accordance with the PC cycle time since there is some fluctuation in the PC cycle time the system opera tion may not be consistent and this should be born in mind when designing the system e When making the connection switch off the power to the NT20S and PC before disconnecting or connecting any connector When screen data transmission is in screen units if there is data other than screen data for example memory table or direct access changes transmit this data also e Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage is possible or for emergency switch applications During work at the panel take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the unit Otherwise the product may malfunction For the connection to the power supply terminal block twisted wires of 2 mm or greater cross sectional area and M3 5 size crimp terminals must be used Tighten the s
54. CA gt iran eh 138 Setting a system key function for a touch switch 0 0 eee 139 Setting error 2 2 6 eee 237 Setting the buzzer 0 cece eee eee 92 Setting the support t00l 112 Setting the words of the character string memory table 0 eee eee eee 164 Setting the words of the numeral memory table 0 eee eee eee 166 Sign display 0 0 e cece 130 Smoothing 0 cece eee eens 119 127 Specify character enlargement 217 Specify displayed characters 220 Standard A brates aaia Bek tates 137 Start up screen 6 ee 118 SUAMING Visca rr aia fe 67 Statuses of touch switches are changed 183 SIOP DIIS s sewn ies ticas net cule deine he 83 Support tool mode 00000eee 95 255 Support tools o o o o 3 31 86 113 Switching predetermined values or character strings according to the situation 174 Switching the continuous screens 124 Switching the power ON OFF when using C200H direct communication 62 Switching the screen display 157 Switching to the RUN mode 90 SISI A PGI argh aie ENET 125 System key functions 0 eee eee 139 System MENU siria alee EN i a 68 System menu display permission 215 T Terminal commands occocccccccco 18 ID tao 137 Thumbwheel type 0 cece eee e
55. EV Applicable CPU CQM1 CPU21 E CQM1 CPU41 E CQM1 CPU42 E CQM1 CPU43 E CQM1 CPU44 E CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV CVM1 CPU01 EV CVM1 CPU11 EV CVM1 CPU21 EV C200HS CPU21 E C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU32 E C200HE CPU42 E C200HG CPU33 E C200HG CPU43 E C200HG CPU53 E C200HX CPU34 E C200HX CPU44 E C200HX CPU54 E C200HX CPU64 E CPU CPU Unit 9 pin Connector Specifications CV1000 CPU01 EV1 C200HS CPU31 E C200HG CPU63 E The host link function incorporated in CV CVM1 CPUs with the exception of EVL cannot be used Complies with EIA RS 232C Signal input and output is relative to the PC Note e Electrical characteristics e Signal direction Connector Signal Signal Direction Signal Name Abbreviation ENS A ac Input DE a A san pa Reveve data roo O pa reguestro send ass O ps fearsa ses o pe signal ground SSN gt e Wiring Connections The NT20S does not use pin 4 RS or pin 5 CS Either short the RS and CS pins of the PC connector together or set the CTS setting selector switch at the rear face of the host link unit to OV see in the figure NT20S PC host link unit Abbrevi Pin Pin Abbrevi atioon number number atioon 1 Connector cover FG SD 2 2 SD RD 3 3 RD RS 232C RS 4 4 RS nterface interface CS 5 5 CS
56. G e Wiring Connections CVM1 CV series host link units have two types of connector which must be wired differently The NT20S does not use pin 4 RS or pin 5 CS Either short the RS and CS pins of the PC connector together or set the CTS setting selector switch at the rear face of the host link unit to OV see in the figure Connect the cable shielding wire to the connector cover and pin 1 at the host link unit end of the cable only Communication Port 1 25 pin Connector NT20S PC host link unit Abbrevi Pin Pin Abbrevi atioon number number atioon 1 1 FG SD 2 2 SD RD 3 3 RD RS 232C RS 4 4 RS nieras interface CS 5 5 CS 6 6 2 7 7 SG 8 8 2 SG 9 Shielding a _ wire 7 ale ee pa el aa 20 ER 25 pin connector Communication Port 2 9 pin Connector NT20S PC host link unit Abbrevi Pin Pin Abbrevi atioon number number atioon 1 Connector cover FG SD 2 2 SD RD 3 3 RD RS 232C RS 4 4 RS eS interface CS 5 5 CS 6 6 E 7 7 CD 8 Z 2 SG 9 9 SG 9 pin connector Shielding wire 260 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host Appendix G Connecting an NT20S to a C Series C200HS C200HX HG HE CPM1 CQM1 CVM1 CV Series EV e C Series C200HX HG HE CPM1 CQM1 CVM1 CV Series
57. LN MOD 5 8 LN 5 PRINT LXS LYS SLS SL LX LYS LN LN 1 IF LN lt 40 THEN GOTO E7 X E7 E LN HEXS LN 1 LN RIGHTS 0 LN 2 SEND SENDS LNS SL RETURN FRESCO O ais salads a tall eta sie aa Draw circle E8 X LOCATE 43 0 PRINT SPACES 36 LOCATE 43 0 INPUT X COORDINATE OF CENTER OF CIRCLE CX IF CX gt 255 OR CX lt 0 THEN E8 X E8 Y LOCATE 43 1 PRINT SPACES 36 LOCATE 43 1 INPUT Y COORDINATE OF CENTER OF CIRCLE CY IF CY gt 127 OR CY lt 0 THEN E8 Y E8 R LOCATE 43 2 PRINT SPACE 36 IF CR gt 63 OR CR lt 0 THEN E8 R CX STR CX CX RIGHTS CX LEN CX 1 CX RIGHTS 00 CX 3 CY STR CY CY RIGHTS CY LEN CY 1 CY RIGHTS 00 CY 3 CR STR CR CRS RIGHTS CR LEN CR 1 CR RIGHT 00 CR 3 SENDS SENDS CX CY CR RETURN ESELECTA Pi a e Item selection routine IF LV 0 THEN LX 3 ELSE LX LV 20 1 IF LV 0 THEN LY 1 ELSE LY 0 COLOR 4 LOCATE LX LY PRINT CMND SECT NO 1 0 COLOR 0 FOR I 2 TO CMND SECT NO IF LV 0 AND I lt 5 THEN LY I IF LV 0 AND I gt 5 THEN LY 1 1 IF LV 1 THEN LY I 1 LOCATE LX LY PRINT CMNDS SECT NO I 0 NEXT I KY IN AS INKEYS IF AS THEN GOTO KY IN IF AS lt gt CHRS amp H1B THEN GOTO KY1 COLOR 0 FOR I 1 TO CMND SECT NO IF LV 0 AND I lt 5 THEN LY I IF LV 0 AND I gt 5 THEN LY I 1 231 EXAMPLE PROGRAM Section 6 7 5120 5130 5140 5150 5160 5170 5180 5190 5200 5210 5220 5230 5240 5250 5260 5270 5280 5290
58. Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Procedure Section 5 2 Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 278 1 Use the support tool to allocate the PT status control area PC to PT to the PC memory Register the memory tables for the numerals and character strings to be dis played when creating the screen data by using the support tool To display a character string use character display and specify the charac ter string memory table by using the support tool To display numerals use numeral display and specify the numeral memory table by using the support tool Set the copy source data to the memory table when creating the screen data by using the support tool Use table edit Create a PC program to write the copy type copy destination memory table number and copy source memory table number to the copy memory table setting word in the PT status control area Order for writing to the PT status control area PC to PT First write the copy destination memory table number and then write the copy source memory table number to the PT status control area PC to PT The NT20S reads the area sometimes when the PC is writing the settings Ifthe copy source memory table number has be
59. N Features of the NT Link e High speed communications with specific types of PCs can be executed e Writing in units of bits to the PC memory area is possible This enables another bit of a word data to which a touch switch has been allo cated to be used for other purpose e g to allocate a lamp e Can be used even while the PC is in the run mode When using a host link the NT20S switches from the run mode to the monitor mode e With NT link 1 N up to eight NT20S units can be connected to a single PC port and used simultaneously e When using C200HX HG HE by installing an expansion communication board in the option slot of the CPU unit itis possible to connect up to three NT link 1 N systems comprising a total of 24 NT20S units For details on communication boards refer to the SYSMAC C200HW COMO1 to C200HW COMO06 E Com munication Board OPERATION MANUAL W304 E1 L The NT link is compatible with the host link The NT20S screen data and the PC programs handled by the host link direct connection can be used with for the NT link as they are 13 Direct Connection Function Section 1 4 1 4 2 C200H Direct Communication C200H direct communication is a communication method that uses C200H C200HS C200HX HG HE and C H I O extensions The C200H direct communication function of the NT20S ST122 V1 allows com munication with a PC C200H C200HS C200HX HG HE COOH using the di rect connection function
60. RS 232C connections C series CQM1 CPU41 E CQM1 CQM1 CPU42 E CQM1 CPU43 E CQM1 CPU44 E C200HS CPU21 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C200HS C200HS CPU23 E selectable 9 pin C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU32 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HE CPU42 E selectable 9 pin C200HG CPU33 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HG CPU43 E selectable 9 pin C200HG C200HG CPU53 E C200HG CPU63 E C200HX CPU34 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HX CPU44 E selectable 9 pin C200HX C200HX CPU54 E C200HX CPU64 E CV500 CPU01 EV1 Features a connector for RS 232C connections CVM1 CV series CV1000 CPU01 EV1 selectable 9 pin CV500 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 Siocon CVM1 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CVM1 CPU11 EV1 CVM1 CPU21 EV1 Note For CPU units marked a communications board is required 272 Model List Appendix J CPUs For Connection Via an NT Link 1 1 MT TIE NS TS AAA CPM1 10CDR Connect an RS 232C adapter to the peripheral port C series CPM1 20CDR CPM1 CPM1 30CDR CQM1 CPU41 E Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C series CQM1 CPU42 E CQM1 CQM1 CPU43 E CQM1 CPU44 E C200HS CPU21 E Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C200HS C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU32 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HE CPU42 E selectable 9 pin C200
61. Rate 9600bps with No The figure to the left shows the NT20S ST121 EV3 screen To set and quit the menu press the WRT amp EXIT touch switch To quit without set ting press Quit e No If a communication error has occurred corresponding error message is displayed and the operation stops e Yes If a communication error has occurred corresponding error message will not be displayed and the operation will be automatically reset 85 Registering the Screen Data 3 6 Reference Registering the Screen Data The screen data is created by using the support tool and registered to the NT20S screen data memory This section describes the procedure to register the screen data to the NT20S For the screen data creation and the support tool operation Section 3 6 refer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual VO28 E1 1 The screen data transmission speed can be increased by setting Hi speed for Communication Mode on the Tool Settings screen of the support tool Unit of Screen Transmission Transmission in File Units 86 The NT20S uses several screens which are switched on its display The screen data of one NT20S unit corresponds to the files created by using the support tool Select a file which contains the screen data to be transmitted when selecting the screen data to be transmitted to the NT20S so that the required screen data can be trans
62. ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 Overview of Direct Connection Operations 0 eee eee 152 5 1 1 Equipment and Settings Used in This Section 0000 0 e eee ee eee 152 5 1 2 Allocatable Bits and Words 0 cece eee cee eee ene ne eee 152 5 1 3 NT20S Status Control and Notification to PC 2 eee eee eee 153 5 1 4 Switching the Screen Display 0 ec eee e ec rr 157 5 1 5 Notifying the Display Screen to the PC To Display the Number of Currently Displayed Screen 004 160 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs 0 0 0 ee ce eee eens 163 5 2 1 Displaying the Contents of Allocated Words of Memory Tables 167 5 2 2 Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words Direct Specification 169 5 2 3 Changing Displayed Numerical Values or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words Indirect Specification 171 5 2 4 Copying the Memory Table o ooococcooccooccncrc rr 174 5 2 5 Upgrading Bar Graphs Changing the Contents of Allocated Words 0 000 e eee eee eee 177 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting 0 eee cece eee eee eee 178 5 3 1 Allocation Bits and Display of Lamps oooooooccroccroccnooc rreren 178 5 3 2 Turning ON lit and OFF unlit the Lamps Changing the Contents of Allocated Bits oooooooocooocorocmm
63. Specifications Display Specifications Dot matrix of STN Number of dots 128 dots vertically x 256 dots horizontally dot size 0 407 mm liquid crystal display resolution panel Effective display area 56 mm vertically x 112 mm horizontally Display mode 1 Blue mode NT20S ST12L Monochrome mode NT20S ST16L View angle Left right direction 35 Life expectancy 50 000 hours minimum Backlight Life expectancy 10 000 hours minimum white cold cathode average 20 000 hours 2 tube Automatic turn off Can be set to turn off in 10 minutes or 1 hour or to remain on Indicators POWER indicator Lit while power is being supplied Green LED RUN indicator Lit during operation Green LED 1 The contrast in the monochrome mode is five times that in the blue mode 2 This is the time it takes for the brightness to decline to half its original value under normal temperature and humidity conditions Panel Specifications Touch panel Number of switches Max 72 registerable per screen 6 vertically x 12 horizontally Input Pressure sensitive type Operating force 100 gf min Life expectancy 1 million operations minimum 244 Specifications Appendix A Display Capacity dl NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 NT20S ST128 Display Character displays Fixed character data character strings registered for each screen elements Character string 128 strings per file 32 bytes per string 32 po
64. Use the support tool to set the lamp attributes e Shape Select from the square and circle shapes The display size can be freely se lected O Square Circle e Frame Select whether or not the boundary line frame of the lamp display area is dis played If the frame is not set only the guide display message for the lamp is displayed when the lamp is not lit or flashing If the guide display message is not set nothing is displayed 133 Lamps Section 4 6 e Lit and flashing Select whether the lamp is lit reverse display or flashing reverse flashing when the lamp is turned ON by the PC e Guide display message Lamps can be displayed with the guide display messages The guide display message attributes are the same as that for the character display Refer to Characters and Figures which can be Displayed page 126 e Frame and lit flashing The display method of lit flashing varies according to the frame setting Frame is set Only the area in the frame will be lit flashing Frame is not set The area including the frame will be lit flashing Frame is set Frame is not set Unit Flash Unit Flash gt 1 gt gt lt lt Area inside the frame Area including the frame flashes flashes e Controlling the lamps in batch More than one lamp can be lit or flashing in batch by registering those l
65. aes 4 A FeaT S os cc ices ete ee eas ete e Wisk blood eae e bdo nee Wiese e Geb aoe bab iene Mae E he ade 4 1 2 2 Principal Functions of NT20S 0 0 eee ee eee eee 6 1 2 3 Comparison between NT20S and NT20M 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 7 1 2 4 Differences Between the NT20S ST121 EV3 and NT20S ST122 V1 8 1 2 5 Displays 28 wg Syste balan gk ke ae eka ea ee ae eee 9 13 System Comfsuration a A gale alters Slate oleae Sada Mette ieee 10 1 3 1 Host Link NT Link 1 1 C200H direct Systems 00 0 0 00 00 e eee eee 10 1 322 NT LECEN System ices ede eg bec cyt cab eae Kas ae ee as bee 11 1 4 Direct Connection Function 0 0 eee ce eee eee e teens 12 12491 INGE Dette 0 iets nein ne A Wie A RA ede Wine hd gow Nab be aoe Wee whe woe 13 1 4 2 C200H Direct Communication 0 cece cee een eens 14 1 5 Communications with PC by Direct Connection 00 0 eee eee eee ene 15 1 5 1 Functions of the Allocated Bits and Words 0 2 cece eee eee eee ene 15 1 6 Communications by RS 232C 0 rr 18 Ir Before Operating des Guu 19 Role and Operation of NT20S Section 1 1 1 1 Role and Operation of NT20S NT20S is a programmable terminal used to display and transmit the information in an FA site The following gives a general description of the role and operation of the NT20S for those who use a programmable terminal PT for the first time
66. area is used to control the NT20S status When data is written to this area in the PC the NT20S reads the contents and operates accord ing to the contents Example of the PT status control area application When data is written to the PT status control area the NT20S will operate as given below Screen 3 A Continuous buzzer sound PT status control area Screen switch setting Memory table Copy setting PT status control bits Numeral memory table 50 El Copy 4 Numeral memory table 7 Co Functions of the PT Status Notify Area NT20S to PC The PT status notify area is used to notify the changes of the NT20S status When a change is made in the NT20S status the change is written to this area in the PC By reading the data from the area the NT20S status can be checked Example of the PT status notify area application When a change is made in the NT20S status such change will be notified to the PT status notify area as mentioned below Numeral memory table 13 Ls PT status notify area E po Currently display screen Content update memory table PT status Allocated word numeral table 13 17 Communications by Rs 232C Section 1 6 1 6 Communications by RS 232C This section gives a brief description of the NT20S control commands sent from the host through the RS 232C interface when the NT20S ST128 is used For details of each of the commands sent through the RS 232C interface
67. cable One connector and one connector cover is supplied with most PCs The parts supplied with each unit are indicated in the table below C series CQM1 XM2A 0901 CVM1 CV series CPU unit 9 pin manufactured by OMRON CV500 LK201 C500 LK203 Connector XM2A 2501 C500 LK201 25 pin manufactured by OMRON C200H LK201 C500 LK201 V1 DB 25P C120 LK201 V1 25 pin manufactured by JAE C series CQM1 XM2S 0911 CVM1 CV series CPU unit 9 pin manufactured by OMRON CV500 LK201 C500 LK203 Connector cover 198 2511 C500 LK201 25 pin made by OMRON C200H LK201 C500 LK201 V1 DB C2 J9 C120 LK201 V1 25 pin made by JAE When connecting the NT20S to a COLIH PC manufactured by OMRON the connector and connector hood must be prepared separately since they are not supplied with the C H The connector provided in the CPU unit of the COCH is a 9 pin connector For the connection the following con nector and connector hood should be prepared e Connector XM2A 0901 9 pin OMRON e Connector cover XM2S 0911 9 pin OMRON Use the cable recommended by OMRON The recommended cables are indicated in the table below MUSICOS ST AWG28 x 5P gt ae IFVV SB Multiconductor shielded cable FUJIKURA Ltd able CO MA VV SB A 5P x 28AWG Multiconductor shielded cable HITACHI Cable Ltd 256 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host Appendix G Connector Specificatio
68. communica tion to enable reception of the required data from the Host Host link NT link RS 232C C200H direct communication Host Sends Data to a Host Data input through a touch panel can be sent to a Host Touch panel ON OFF information numeric data etc Screen Data The screen data to be displayed on the NT20S can be created by a computer by using support tools Connect the NT20S to a PC AT with an RS 232C cable so that the screen data are transferred to the NT20S Create screen data PC AT support tools RS 232C e This connection is made only to transmit the screen data by using NT20S and tools If C200H direct communication is used the support tool and Host can both be connected at the same time Functions of NT20S Section 1 2 1 2 Functions of NT20S The NT20S has the following features which are different from those of existing NT20M 1 2 1 Features Downsized Body e The NT20S has the thinnest depth 54 mm or less in the panel in the NT series e The width is shorter by 30 mm maintaining the existing display area e The system keys and tool connectors are located at other than the front side e The communication cable connectors are housed in the unit so that they do not protrude from the unit e The tool connectors and the Host communication connectors are used in com mon when the host link NT link or RS 232C is used Construction Best Suited to the FA Environment e
69. control area PC to PT to the PC memory 2 Create a PC program to write the number of the displayed screen to the screen switch setting word in the PT status control area Use a 4 digit BCD binary coded decimal value to set a screen number If a screen has been switched by operating the PT status control area PC to PT the contents of the currently displayed screen word in the PT status notify area PT to PC also change e Screen switching timing The NT20S screen switches when the contents of the screen switch setting have changed To re specify the number of the currently specified screen first write the value 0000 to clear the screen before writing the appropriate screen number e Use of the screen switching strobe Create a program to read the number of the currently displayed screen and to write the number to the screen switch setting word at the leading edge of the screen switching strobe of the PT status notify area This program enables screen switching by using the touch switches on the NT20S and eliminates re peated setting of the same screen number If the screen switching is not executed on the NT20S the screen switching strobe does not need to be checked For the screen switching strobe refer to the notifying the displayed screen to the PC mentioned below Overview of Direct Connection Operations Section 5 1 e Continuous screens and overlapping screens Continuous or
70. cover which matches the host computer connector type Connection For Host The shielding wire of the cable is connected at the host side only to the connector cover and pin No 1 The figure below shows the wiring when RS CS control is used If RS CS control is not used short RS and CS at both the NT20S side and host side NT20S HOST Abbrevi Pin Pin Abbrevi ation number number ation FG 1 1 FG SD 2 2 SD RD 3 3 RD RS 232C RS 4 4 RS netics interface CS 5 5 CS E 6 6 z z 7 7 SG 2 8 3 a SG 9 Shielding 3 wire 25 pin type 264 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host Appendix G Making the Cable The procedure to make up the cable is described below Refer to the following explanation when making an RS 422A cable also Cable Preparation The preparation of the cable differs according to whether or not the shielding wire is to be connected to the FG e Cable with Shielding Wire Connected to FG 1 Cut the cable to the required length 2 Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade Take care not to damage the shielding underneath e Cut back the shielding wire with scissors Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire Fold back the shielding wire Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded back shielding wire ZA A a A X Z tS oO Units
71. emergency or an NT20S error Except when the buzzer has been set so as not to sound at all the buzzer will sound when an error occurs To set the buzzer to sound in other cases the follow ing two procedures can be used e Controlled by the Host It is possible to control the NT20S from the Host to sound the buzzer during the operation Refer to Section 5 4 NT20S Status Control page 191 e Set the buzzer as a screen data attribute by using the support tool When creating the screen data by using the support tool set the buzzer as a screen attribute so that the buzzer will sound When the screen in which this at tribute has been set is displayed the NT20S will give the buzzer sound If the control by the Host and the display of the screen in which the buzzer attribute has been set are executed simultaneously the priority is given to the control by the Host Refer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual VO28 E1 L The buzzer sound can be stopped by the following operation e Control by the Host e Switch the screen to a screen which does not have a buzzer attribute e Press the touch switch to which the buzzer stop attribute has been set If a buzzer stop attribute has been set to a touch switch created on the screen in which the buzzer attribute has been set such touch switch can be used to stop the buzzer sound For details on setting buzzer attributes for touch switches see Al location of System Key
72. ene 127 425 2 Bat Graphs A A pie ceed tab dea ments elena Gad ch Ba Se geese A 129 4 5 1 Bar Graph Functions inesi K en eiA KAKAA AA eee eee eee 129 NN 133 4 671 Lamp FUNCHONS E E E ta SiS ated ANG ea ells ote 133 427 Touch Switches ci AAA Vee ead Ie choad 136 4 7 1 Functions of Touch Switches 0 cece eee nent nee 137 4 7 2 Screen Switching Function 0 0 cece cece eee eee ene nee 138 4 7 3 System Key Functions 00 0 cece eee eee eee tence ene nee 139 4 8 Numeral Setting cartulina townie bebe ke ein iaa lite ey aii ee 140 4 8 1 The Numeral Setting Function 0 0 cece cece nen eens 140 4 8 2 Types of Numeral Setting 0 ce eee een eens 142 4 8 3 Creating Numeric Keys 0 eee ec eeen eee een een eens 143 4 8 4 Using Numeric Keys necio ia rt ada elie as 145 4 8 5 Using The Thumbwheel Type of Numeral Setting Ver 5 Direct Connection Only 147 4 8 6 Settings for Numeral Settings 0 eke eects 148 111 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data Section 4 1 4 1 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data This section describes briefly the support tool settings required for creating screen data and the screen data creation procedure Reference Forthe details ofthe support tool and screen data creation referto the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 L 4 1 1 Setting the support tool for use with the NT20S To create the screen data for t
73. environment so that the values fall within the stated range or adjust the NT20S Point Inspected Inspection Details Inspection Instrument Power supply voltage Fluctuation in power supply Permissible voltage fluctuation Tester terminal voltage range 24 Yoc 15 10 Ambient environmental Ambient temperature 0 to 50 C Thermometer conditions temperature in the operation panel Ambient humidity 35 to 85 RH Hygrometer humidity in the operation panel Presence absence of dust Dust must not be settled Visual inspection Mounting conditions Looseness of mounting To be no looseness Accessory tools brackets etc Connector connections of To be fully inserted and locked connecting cable with no looseness Looseness of screws in To be no looseness Philips screwdriver external wiring Conditions of external Faults such as incipient Visual inspection connecting cables disconnections Components with limited Brightness of the backlight Must be sufficiently bright Visual inspection lives Backlight life Brightness is halved after about 20 000 hours in use Note Do not attempt to disassemble the NT20S for repair or modification e The disposal of the NT20S and used backlights may be regulated by national or local authorities Dispose of them in accordance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local authority Reference When replacing the NT20S after discovering a fault during inspections note the foll
74. error occurs frequently set flow control for communications Time Out The connectors of the connecting Reconnect the cable cable have become disconnected The PC is stopped Make sure the PC is able to communicate with the NT20S During transmission of one Confirm the proper command length command a time lapse exceeding 5 seconds is detected Reconnect the cable NAK Received Noise caused data corruption during Use a noise resistant cable if communication occurs end code simultaneously communication in an environment with high levels of noise displayed Check the end code by referring to the PC user s manual Unit No Error The unit does not match that set on Set the PC unit to 0 the PC The PC is transmitting incorrect data Check PC operation Noise caused data corruption during Use a noise resistant cable if communication occurs communication in an environment with high levels of noise FCS Error The PC is transmitting incorrect data Check PC operation Noise caused data corruption during Use a noise resistant cable if communication occurs communication in an environment with high levels of noise 7 3 Maintenance of the NT20S Carry out maintenance work in order to ensure that the NT20S is always used in its optimum condition N WARNING Do not attempt to take the PC apart and do not touch any internal parts while the power is being supplied Doing either of these may result in electrical shock
75. is only executed when statuses change When changes occur simultaneously the proces sings are executed in accordance with the order of priority NT20S processing Details of processing man Writing to PT status notify area PT PC e A i cle ech ea ie the Pe E pre oo o o ore 3 Wingo nuneralmemorities er po na comen atmane alocare me PO wen he O L me Writing to character string memory tables PT PC peli ARO ee OCC Switeh Data is only written to PC bits and numeral character string memory tables for elements in screens currently being displayed If the contents of numeral character string memory tables that are not being displayed change the changed data is not written to the PC 254 Function Restrictions Depending on the Support Tool Appendix F APPENDIX F Function Restrictions Depending on the Support Tool Screens can be created for an NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 by using the conventional support tools indicated below e NT series NT20M NT2000M NT600M support tool Ver 4 In addition the NT series support tool Ver 2 1 can be used with Ver 4 of the direct connection function However when the above support tools are used or Ver 4 direct connection is used restrictions apply to some func tions as shown in the table below The expressions used for support tools in the table have the following meanings NTM V4 NT series NT20M NT2000M NT600M support t
76. magnetic field solenoids etc provide a gap of at least 40 mm e Secure sufficient space for ventilation e Do not install in sites subject to severe vibration or strong shocks e Install at a distance from high voltage devices and power equipment in consideration of operabil ity and safety during maintenance Note The angle of visibility of the LCD display screen is 35 degrees to left and right Install it at a position height and orientation that will make it easy for personnel to see it e Install the PT at a location as far as possible from personal computers radio equipment radios etc The electromagnetic waves generated by the PT will cause radio interference e When using the RS 232C 5V output check the current capacity of the connected equipment The maxi mum current value of the NT20S 5 V output is 150 mA Transportation and Storage of the PT Note on transportation Pack the PT in the packaging intended for it before transporting it Note on storage Maintain the storage ambient temperature 20 to 70 C and storage ambient humidity 35 to 85 RH 251 NT20S Internal Processing Appendix E APPENDIX E NT20S Internal Processing When the direct connection function is used the following processing is executed inside the NT20S Processing is divided into two types periodic processing and event processing Periodic Processing When Using Direct Connection The following processing is executed inside the
77. mm in Aluminum foil tape 265 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host Appendix G e Cable with Shielding Wire Not Connected to FG 1 Cut the cable to the required length 2 Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade Take care not to damage the shielding underneath Cut back the shielding wire with scissors S Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire Wrap vinyl tape over the cut off end of the shielding wire G Units mm in Vinyl tape 266 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host Appendix G Soldering 1 Slide heat shrink tube over each wire 2 Pre solder each wire and connector cable 3 Solder each wire to the connector terminal Soldering iron Heat shrink tube Hishitube F 1 5 dia 10 4 Push the heat shrink tube over the soldered joint and heat the tube to shrink it in place Heat shrink tube Connector Cover Assembly Assemble the connector covers as shown in the diagram below Aluminum foil tape End connected to FG End not connected to FG 267 Making the cable for Connection to the Support Tool Appendix H APPENDIX H Making the Cable for Connection to the Support Tool The wiring to be done depends on the type of RS 232C connector at the personal computer e For a 25 pin connector
78. not be consistent and this should be born in mind when designing the system Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication Section 2 7 2 7 2 Connection Method Connect the NT20S and PC The connection conditions are different for C200H HS C200HX HG HE and N Caution N Caution Reference CUO e Always turn off the power at the PC and PT before connecting the C200H inter face cable Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably e After connecting the communication cable always secure it with the screws Otherwise the cable may disconnect causing operation to fail I O connection cable Use the following models of I O connection cable TO A Y co C200H ON NT20M CNP711 NT20M CNP221 ane C200H CN221 NT20M CNP521 ee C200H CN521 For connecting C200H HS HE HG HX For connecting C NT20M CNP131 NT20M CNP712 NT20M CNP222 2m C20H CN222 The C200H interface side connector of NT20M CNP has been down sized e Keep the total length of I O cables used within 12 m 6 m for COOH e The cable s tensile load is 30 N Do not subject it to loads greater than this Otherwise a discontinuity may occur causing operation to fail If a C200H CN or C20H CN is used as the I O connection cable the connector will project beyond the bottom face of the NT20S If the I O cable is
79. of words within 16 words required for registering the character string data One word can store two normal size characters e Setting the words for the character string memory tables The character string memory tables can be allocated to the following PC words Set the word type and the first word m Batawemoy O Daawenoy 0 en menassa Rey O remases 0 CNT Counter Counter Pe roma EA oe AR Rowan Rely SN LN i Ee O OK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use If the number of registration words x 2 word setting window set with the sup port tool is larger than the number of character digits character string display setting window the character string may be broken halfway The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 278 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 Displaying and Referencing Numeral Memory Table Contents Reference Since the numeral memory tables can be allocated to the words in the PC the PC can write data to the numeral memory tables or the initial values can be set when creating the screen data Also by relating the numeral memory tables with the bar graphs the bar graphs corresponding to the data of the numeral memory tables can be displayed During the operation the display conte
80. ooo ooo 212 6 5 Controlling the NT20S Status 0 rr 214 6 6 Terminal Commands 0 ccc ee ee eee ereere roere 216 6 7 Key to Programs s gece a ced ph eee oe ees Lede a Aa la be eet eb A Geka 222 6 7 1 USe Of POBLADOS tecoacriiian dt demande hates de 222 EXAMPLE PROGRAM 223 ciccstoe es a ee She a a 223 199 Table of Commands Section 6 1 Table of Commands Operating Commands CI CI 7 Terminal Commands os Gommand Mame Pe Character Sze TESOL ESC Character Specify Size ESC Specify Character Enlargement Character Display ESC Normal Display Attributes ESC Set Inverse Display SCI 200 RS 232C Interface Unit Communications Section 6 1 6 1 RS 232C Communications This section describes the communication procedure when using an NT20S ST128 RS 232C and program flow using examples in BASIC 6 1 1 Communication Procedure The Host and NT20S communicate according to the following procedure 1123 1 The RS 232C circuit must be opened i e communication enabled before communication can start 2 Commands are used to control the PT and to receive notification from the NT20S 3 Close the RS 232C circuit again after communication is complete Host program RS 232C circuit NT20S operation Open circuit OPEN command al Send instruction PRINT command gt Receive instruction LINE INPUT command i Send instruction CLOSE commana 2
81. read such allocated bits and words so as to change the display elements control the operating status and notify the status This function is called the direct connection function The NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 is designed exclusively for use with the direct connection The bits and words allocated by the direct connection function are called allocated bit and allocated word respectively This function allows to read the information to be displayed on the NT20S from the memory area in the PC and to write it to the memory table in the NT20S Also the data input on the NT20S can be written to the PC s memory area The NT20S screen status can be switched according to the PC s memory area and the NT20S s status data can be written to the PC s memory area The NT20S ST121 EV3 can only communicate with a PC that supports the host link or NT link function The NT20S ST122 V1 can only communicate with PCs that support the C200H direct communication function DM area Internal relay area gt gt lt Auxiliary relay area Timer counter 12 Direct Connection Function Section 1 4 Features of the Direct Connection Function e The bits and words referring to operating status and work instruction information and those for storing input data can be freely allocated to almost any part of the PC memory Bits and words in the PC can be referenced from
82. secure it with the screws Otherwise the cable may disconnect causing operation to fail Note If using the 5 V supply of pin No 6 check first that the equipment that is to receive the supply has a current capacity no greater than 150 mA The 5 V output of the NT20S is 5 V DC 5 max 150 mA 64 SECTION 3 System Menu Operation This section describes the operation of the System Menu focusing on the procedure to start up the NT20S Functions which will be convenient to use the NT20S and those which are useful for the system maintenance are also ex plained here 3 1 Operation Flow by the System Menu 0 eee cece eee nen ene 66 3 2 Starina the NI208 wai hha A ni hdres oli 67 3 2 1 Changing the System Settings etc 2 0 ec eee eens 67 3 3 Operation Modes and the System Menu 00 eee eee cee een ene 68 3 3 1 System Menu and the Operation Modes 0 e eee ee eee 68 3 3 2 MENU Tieg ero cso stand de betes a tdt 69 3 3 3 Operations with the System Menu 0 eee eee cee eee ene 70 3 4 Initializing Memory tec oi a da ee A A a tad a as aa 72 3 4 1 Initialization by Using the System Menu 00 cece eee eee eee 72 3 4 2 Initialization by Using the DIP Switch Forced Initialization 74 3 5 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches 75 3 5 1 Selecting the Host Communication Method NT20S ST121 EV3 only 78
83. set In addition continuous lines and circles can be drawn ESC amp 1B 26 Clears all text and graphics on the NT20S screen Even if this command is used to clear a screen the NT20S still displays the pre ceding screens After the display of number text lamps or touch switches is upgraded only the upgraded parts are re displayed Terminal Commands Section 6 6 Character Specify Size Format Description Reference ESC my my Character size 0 304 Normal size 16 x 8 dots H x W 1 311 1 2 size 8 x 8 dots H x W Specifies if 1 byte alphanumeric characters sent subsequently are displayed as normal characters or 1 2 size characters The character string is specified with the Specify Displayed Characters Command refer to 6 6 Specify Displayed Characters Both normal characters and 1 2 size characters are enlarged as specified by the Specify Character Enlargement Com mand refer to 6 6 Specify Character Enlargement below The character size specified with this command remains valid until the screen dis play is switched or another character size is specified with the command The de fault character size is normal characters Specify Character Enlargement Format Description Reference ESC m4 my Character enlargement O 30 No enlargement 1 314 Enlarge height x 2 2 32 Enlarge width x 2 3 33 2 x 2 enlargement 4 3411
84. settings eee eee 109 DataSet ae pdas 83 Data memory DM 2 eee o 178 Data transmission in screen units 87 Decimal fraction parts 0005 146 Determining the numeral memory table NUDE se eee Li ae ee eee dee ee ee 188 Determining touch switch status 183 Difference between direct connection Ver 4 and Difference between the NT20S ST12L and NT20S ST16E tater cess tient wal As 8 282 Direct conn setting screen 115 Direct connection os saoir recare 12 Direct information oooocccccccccco o 237 Direct setting lt o caicossisriarsrie tirrenia 113 Direct specification 163 165 169 Display elements o ooooccocccocco oo 15 Display frame 0 0 ee 137 Display specified screen 204 Draw Circle 0 cece eee eee 221 Draw polyline 0 eee 221 E ERRON ceca dados credo AEEA s rie 94 EX Tis ihe fete edt cda en te 100 Edit SCr en e peace id eat eed 115 8 digit number input notify 212 8 digit write numeral memory table 206 End flashing display ooooooo o o 219 End inverse display oo oooooooo 218 End plates ricota 149 Enlarged display cece eee o 119 Error message when the NT20S is started 72 F FA SIG nice lec ee ati iia ieee nine 2 Factory setting ocea sii cee eee ee
85. switch eee 125 Bit touch switch method 208 BUZZ a 193 Buzzer attribute oooooooooomo o 193 Buzzer control A rered reiia eee eee 215 c C200H C200HS re openi i a cee eee eee 60 C200H direct communication 14 58 OPU iie ada dara a 42 273 C Piia aaa a a a A 61 Cables with connectors 275 Cannot be normally started 72 Cannot communicate o o occccccccccc oo 236 Caution comica aad dead ae xii xiii Changing displayed numerals or character strings 169 171 174 Changing the contents of allocated words 169 171 174 Changing the lamp display status 179 Changing the status of allocated bits 183 Changing the system settings 67 Character string scene eee 17 Character string memory table 126 168 Character specify size oo oo ooo 217 Characters aaee renen Ee ae ed 9 119 126 Checking the LCD ooocccccccccco 103 Checking the LED 0ooocccccccccco 105 Checking the PT setting 107 Checking the buzzer 000000 104 Checking the communications 100 Checking the screen memory 106 Checking the touch switches 99 Child Screens 00 0 eee eee 122 123 Classification of SCreensS 0 o oo 122 Clear screen 1 6 cee eee 21
86. switched also by pressing a touch switch during the op eration after registering a screen number to the touch switch For this function refer to the Standalone Function page 138 To switch the NT20S screen display by controlling from the PC write a screen number at the screen switch setting in the PT status control area PT status control area lt a Screen switch setting lt x Screen number Copy memory Designated screen table setting PT status control setting Screen switch setting in the PT status control area PT status notify bits 1514131211109 8765 43 21 OBit Screen number 4 digit BCD Screen switch setting Screen number 0000 screen clear no display 0001 to 0500 157 Overview of Direct Connection Operations Section 5 1 158 Procedure e Available allocation words The PT status control area PC to PT can be allocated to the following PC areas Du paamenoy O paame o eH memalspecalRolay O etemalSpecialRelay O m pme timer J gt enr fome x fome f gt m homes TO AR oey O aanne e m wry TO O OK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix LPC Memory Map page 278 1 Use the support tool to allocate the PT status
87. table for indirect specification are speci fied in hexadecimal format or the number specified is outside the valid range for memory table numbers the display is not updated Notes on writing character strings The points to note when displaying character strings are the same as those de scribed for direct specification See Important points when writing a character string page 149 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 Example Use of Indirect Specification This example shows a case where the displayed character string is changed by incrementing the contents of the allocated word of the numeral memory table ref erenced in indirect specification e Settings with the support tool Make the following settings with the support tool Numeral memory table number 51 DM 0000 number of registered words 1 Character string memory table number 100 NT610G 6 digits Character string memory table number 101 NT610C 6 digits Character string memory table number 102 NT20S 6 digits Character string memory table number 103 NT600S 6 digits Data registered for the screen numeral memory table number 51 Line 1 Numeral memory table number 51 specified in indirect specification of character string display e PC program Create the PC ladder program as follows 00100 INC 38 DM0000 00101 DEC 39 DM0000 e Program operation 1 Numer
88. the currently displayed screen word For the continuous and overlapping screens refer to the Classification of Screens page 122 161 Overview of Direct Connection Operations Section 5 1 Example of Reading the Number of Currently Display Screen 162 This example gives a PC program that reads the screen number each time the screen is switched In this example the number of the previous screen is also stored e Support tool settings Make the following settings with the support tool PT status notify area Word 0110 e PC ladder program 11212 Screen switch strobe flag e Program operation MOV 21 DM0100 DMO0101 MOV 21 110 DM0100 1 Word for storing the number of the previous screen 2 Word for notifying the number of the currently displayed screen Word for storing a new screen number 1 When the NT20S screen display switches and the screen switch strobe flag bit 11212 turns ON the contents of DM0100 are transferred to DM0101 The number of the previously displayed screen is stored in word 0101 2 The new screen number notified by the NT20S is read and transferred to DM0100 The number of the currently displayed screen is stored in DM0100 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 5 2 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Displaying and Referencing Character String Memory Table Contents Since the character string memory t
89. the Host Reference If more than one touch switch is pressed at the same time only the address of the touch switch which was pressed first is reported to the Host Notification of numeral setting is not executed in the case of touch switches which have been allocated as ten keys Touch Switch Bit Output from NT20S to Host Format ESC J s04 s02 st sto s24 S22 s34 35 CR 1B ah oe e Toe se ae ae loge a op s0 s3 Status of the touch switch 2 digit hexadecimal value for each switch The relationship between the touch switch number and an expression of sO to s3 in bits is given in the following table sx1 Higher 4 bits of sx x O to 3 sx2 Lower 4 bits of sx Bit ON The touch switch is on Bit OFF The touch switch is off Example Touch switches at addresses 0 3 21 and 27 are ON s0 50251 517824522831 532 09002008 Description e If the touch switch status is changed while the screen for which the Bit Input Touch Switch attribute is set is displayed the status of the corresponding bit is reported to the Host e This report is made each time a touch switch is turned ON or OFF 213 Controlling the NT20S Status Section 6 5 6 5 Controlling the NT20S Status This section describes the actual methods used for controlling the NT20S status The Screen Display Control Command is used to operate the back light of the NT20S i e switch it on and off The Buzz
90. the PC the NT20S will read the data and operates according to the data The PT status control area is configured as four consecutive words as shown below Word 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 n aa Screen 4 digit BCD O Bit Screen switch setting table setting n 1 ae Copy source memory table 3 digit BCD Copy memory n 2 Copy type Copy destination memory table 3 digit BCD PT status control The first word word n of the PT status control area must be set with the support tool e Screen switch settings refer to page 157 Specify the screen to switch the screen displayed on the NT20S e Copy memory table settings refer to page 174 Specify the memory table to copy the contents of a memory table internally in the NT20S Set the copy type to match the type of memory table to be copied 0 Character string memory table 1 Numeral memory table e PT status control bits refer to page 191 These bits are switched ON and OFF to control the NT20S buzzer and backlight 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Bit n 3 CH 0 0 0 Item Controlled 1 ON O OFF Screen display Note 1 ON OFF Processing priority ON OFF registration Note 2 Continuous buzzer ON OFF Intermittent buzzer ON OFF Backlight mode ON Flash Note 1 When ON is set for screen display the backlight is on when OFF is set for scre
91. the PT is always operating normally e Always turn off the power at the PC and PT before connecting the C200H inter face cable Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably If the actual character string is longer than the specified character string length the specified number of characters is written and the remainder are discarded A timeout error message is displayed if the actual character string is shorter than the specified character string length This command cannot be used to write negative numbers Use the 8 digit Write Command refer to 6 3 8 digit Write Numeral Memory Table The display attributes set with the Support Tool determine if lamps 0 to 31 light continuously or flash The display status set with this command is ignored This command cannot be used for negative numbers Always set 8 as the num ber of transferred digits when negative numbers may be input xvii xviii SECTION 1 Functions of the NT20S NT20S is a new programmable terminal PT which incorporates a host interface unit and a RS 232C interface unit in a pro grammable terminal body It can be easily installed and used This section gives the operation examples and characteristics of the NT20S so that you will understand the applications of the NT20S 1 1 R le and Operation of NT20S_ 0 ee eee eae 2 1 1 1 Operations Of NT208 o ersada ase is eek ee te Na ea He Aa eee 3 122 Functions of NTZOS a Seta asia gees A Siete eda Sada Mette
92. to each other as shown below For the operations with the System Menu refer to the Operations with the System Menu page 70 RUN mode The NT20S runs in this state Controls from the Host are enabled and various indications and 1 O operations are made Transmit mode Screen data and other data are transmitted between the NT20S and a support tool When system settings To change system settings or and screen data screen data contents registration have been completed SYSTEM MENU Power ON Maintenance mode Maintenance mode The NT20S maintenance operations such as memory initialize and setting check are executed Operation modes and the System Menu Section 3 3 3 3 2 Menu Tree SYSTEM MENU m Quit I Transmit Mode page 86 Maintenance Mode MAINTENANCE MENU m Quit H PT Setting page 107 I O Check Memory Switch DIP SW Status page 109 The System Menu allows to effect various NT20S functions by using the touch switches The NT20S s functions with respect to the System Menu are related as shown below For the operations with the System Menu refer to the Operations with the System Menu page 70 1 0 CHECK MENU m Quit LED Check page 105 H Buzzer page 104 Touch Switch page 99 Data Memory page 106 m LCD Display page 103 Comm Ch
93. touch switch is pressed the PC s notification bit comes ON 1 or goes OFF 0 e Numeral memory table Allocation destination Word Numeral memory PC table 1 Tmoos Mid ae rmos 2 ooosca a 27330 Numeral memory table 150 0005CH Allocate numeral memory tables to arbitrary words in the PC If word contents change when corresponding numeral memory table is displayed on the screen the value on the screen will also change Monitoring of words can also be made easily Reading and writing are executed so that the contents of allocated words and contents of numeral memory tables are always the same during display e Character string memory table Allocation destination Word NT20S lt 7 moio 6 1 6 2 Ca b molo 16 3 6 4 er d vwoio2 6 5 6 6 e P Character string memory table 1 Allocated word number 3ch First word DM0100 Allocate character string memory tables to arbitrary words in the PC If word contents change when corresponding character string memory table is dis played on the screen the value on the screen will also change Messages canbe displayed easily Reading and writing are executed so that the contents of allocated words and contents of character string memory tables are always the same during display 16 Communications with PC by Direct Connection Section 1 5 Functions of the PT Status Control Area PC to NT20S The PT status control
94. which the system key functions are allocated Refer to System key functions page 139 Production Status Line A Normal Line B Normal 124 Screen Display Section 4 3 4 3 2 Screen Attributes Buzzer Attribute Numeral Setting Attribute Reference Each screen can be set with a specific function by designating a screen attribute so that the specific function can be executed by displaying the screen For exam ple by displaying a screen to which a buzzer attribute has been set the buzzer of the NT20S starts sounding Set the screen attributes for each screen on the screen selection screen of the support tool Note that the support tool displays some items that are not used with the NT20S such as history attribute alarm and backlight color The following several attributes can be set with one screen This attribute will become effective to sound the buzzer in the NT20S when the screen to which this attribute has been set is displayed The buzzer sound can be set as follows No Buzzer does not sound when the screen is displayed Continuous sound Buzzer sounds continuously Intermittent sound Buzzer sounds intermittently at constant intervals The buzzer sound is set with the NT20S memory switch The buzzer can also be set by using the Host Refer to Using the buzzer page 92 for the buzzer setting using the memory switch To st
95. word numeral memory table 20 specification memory table 20 DM0000 abcd 4 gt 0051 gt 0 0 5 1 Character Allocated word character string table 51 string memory table 51 DM0100 abcd gt 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 163 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 This specification method is a little complex but it allows the display to be changed more easily according to the circumstances In the example above if 1 were add ed to the contents of memory table 20 to give 52 the contents of memory table 52 would be displayed instead The memory tables used for display can also be allocated to areas in the PC so that the display can also be changed in response to changes in the data to be dis played i e the contents of character string memory table 51 in the example above However in comparison with direct specification indirect specification requires more time for processing Setting the Words of the Character String Memory Table 164 When creating the screen data by using the support tool make the following set tings for each numbered character string e Initialization setting Set whether or not the PC words are initialized with the character string memory table initial value registered to the screen data memory when the main power supply is turned ON or reset e Number of registration words Set the number
96. xiv xiii Safety Precautions 1 2 3 Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowl edge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions Z WARNING N WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not desctibed in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amusement ma chines safety equipment and other systems machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for using the Programmable Terminal Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that Programmable Terminals and related devices be used for t
97. 00H Direct Communication A Caution Note Note The NT20S ST122 V1 functions as an I O extension unit of the PC Use the fol lowing procedure to switch the power ON and OFF Depending on the method used to switch the power ON and OFF the entire sys tem may stop Follow the procedure described below to switch the power ON and OFF Switch the power ON as follows NT20S power ON Connecting to Host is displayed on the NT20S screen y PC power ON After Connecting to Host has been displayed for approximately 1 second normal operation starts e If the power to the PC is switched on first the CPU of the PC is subjected to a system reset making operations such as programming console impossible Then when the power to the NT20S is switched on Connecting to Host is dis played on the NT20S screen for approximately 1 second after which normal op eration starts e If the I O connection cable is disconnected during system operation an I O bus error occurs at the PC side and operation stops If this happens connect the I O connection cable and cancel the error Switch the power OFF as follows Switch the power supplies to the PC and NT20S off simultaneously E dake The next time the power is switched ON the NT20S dis plays the screen that was displayed when the power was switched OFF e Ifthe power to the NT20S is switched off first the CPU of the PC is subjected toa system reset makin
98. 2 e Program operation 1 Word for least significant 4 digits of 1 2 Word for most significant 4 digits of 1 3 Word for 2 1 The contents of word DMO0000 are incremented by 1 each second The value displayed on the NT20S in numeral memory table entry 1 increases by 1 each second 2 When the counter in 1 above causes an increase in the most significant dig its the contents of word DM0001 are incremented by 1 each second The val ue displayed on the NT20S in numeral memory table entry 1 most significant digits increases by 1 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 3 When bit 00001 turns ON the contents of DM0002 are incremented by 1 The value displayed on the NT20S in numeral memory table entry 2 increases by 1 5 23 Changing Displayed Numerical Values or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words Indirect Specifica tion The following explains how to change numerical values or character strings dis played by the NT20S by changing the contents of the referenced allocated words using indirect specification This method can only be used with Ver 5 of the direct connection function If using direct specification see Changing Displayed Numerical Values or Char acter Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words Direct Specification page 169 Numerical values and character strings can also be changed by making a copy of the memory tables Refer to
99. 2 A 34 Normal display oooooocooccooco o 218 Normal Screen ooccocccccc 122 Notes on the notification operation 182 Nothing is displayed o oooooooo 236 Notification of numbers to the PC 188 Notify bit s semiran rapida penas 181 Notifying the NT20S status 156 Notifying the PC sssaaa aeaea 1 Notifying the display elements 155 Notifying the display screen 160 Number of registration words 164 166 Numeral memory table 127 167 Numeral setting o ooo o o 123 140 Numeral setting attribute 125 143 Numeral setting strobe 188 197 Numeric key type 0 cece eee 142 Numeric keyS 0 0 eee eee 143 Numeric valueS 0 0 00 cece eee ee 9 O OMRON product references V 100 VAIUC er ardid 130 Operating status oooocoooomm o 2 197 Operation saiisine a n ra eee 68 Operation by operating commands 202 Operation by terminal commands 202 284 Operation commands saasaa aaaea 18 Operation mode ccc ee eee 68 Operation panel 00 cece eee eee 28 Operations with the system menu 70 Order for writing 0 cee cece eee ee 175 Overlapping screen 122 140 159 161 P PG dro 32 45 48 PC memory map 0 cece eee eee 278 PC switch set
100. 2 1 NT20S Screen Composition of the Screen Screen Management Special Screen Number 118 This section gives the outline of the screen which is the basis of all NT20S func tions For specific operation procedure such as screen switching refer to Switching the Screen Display page 157 The NT20S screen is composed of horizontal 256 dots x vertical 128 dots Each dot is set by the combination of the X horizontal and Y vertical coordinates The origin of coordinates 0 0 is set at the top left corner of the screen 0 X coordinate horizontal 0 255 Y coordinate Coordinates vertical x y 127 255 127 The screens displayed on the NT20S are managed by the screen numbers When using the NT208S up to 495 screens can be created and screen numbers in the ranges 1 to 250 and 256 to 500 can be used numbers 251 to 255 are reserved for system use The display screens can be switched or the start up screen can be set by designat ing the screen number from the Host Screen number 0 is reserved for the system as the no display screen Select this to display nothing on the NT20S screen Outline of Functions Section 4 2 4 2 2 Characters and Figures Which can be Displayed The NT20S screen can display characters figures and other various elements This section describes the types and attributes of the characters and figures which can be displayed and do not need to be changed at all For the s
101. 232C RS 422A RS 232C RS 422A RS 232C RS 422A RS 232C RS 422A converter unit converter unit converter unit converter unit type NT AL001 type NT ALO01 type NT AL001 type NT AL001 UDS NIDO INDI ANNNNNNN a RS 485 cable RS 485 cable amp RS 485 cable E RS 485 cable E RS 232C RS 422A converter unit ld RS 232C cable RS 232C cable RS 232C cable RS 232C cable max length 2 m max length 2 m max length 2 m max length 2 m Total cable length 500m RS 232C Cable Wiring Same as for an RS 422A connection Refer to RS 422A connection page 52 RS 485 Cable Wiring e NT ALOO1 to NT ALOO1 NT ALOO1 NT ALOO1 Abbrev Pin No Pin No Abbrev Functional Functional ground 1 1 ground RS 422A SDB 3 3 SDB RS 422A terminal terminal block SDA 4 4 SDA block RDB 5 5 RDB RDA 6 6 RDA Shielding wire e PC to NT ALOO1 PC NT AL001 Abbrev Pin No Abbrev nsazon Comecir cover A soe interface SDA 3 SDB block SDB 4 SDA Shielding wire 54 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 6 NT AL001 Converter Unit DIP Switch Settings The DIP switch settings to be made at an NT ALO01 used in the wiring depend on whether it is connected part way along the RS 422A 485 cable or is at the end of the RS 422A 485 cable e RS 422A connection RS 232C at the PC side
102. 4 SECT9 IF SECT NO lt gt 9 THEN GOTO LV2 END ON SEL NO GOSUB ESC 7 ESC 8 ELVZ END A a raves og anew reve Gaver Confirm transmission LOCATE 0 12 PRINT LEFTS SEND 56 IF LEN SENDS gt 56 THEN PRINT LOCATE 66 12 PRINT OK YN 1 YN KY IN LOCATE 74 12 COLOR 2 2 YN PRINT Y COLOR 2 2 YN PRINT N AS INKEYS IF AS THEN GOTO YN KY IN IF AS CHR amp H1C OR A CHR amp H1D THEN YN YN 1 GOTO YN KY IN IF AS lt gt CHRS amp HD THEN GOTO YN KY IN EXAMPLE PROGRAM Section 6 7 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 2110 2120 2130 2140 2150 2160 2170 2180 2190 2200 2210 2220 2230 2240 2250 2260 2270 2280 2290 2300 2310 2320 2330 2340 2350 LOCATE 66 12 COLOR 0 PRINT SPACES 14 IF YN 1 THEN GOTO LV3 END GOSUB SEND V ocoooocooooooooooooooooooooooo Send command COM 1 ON LOCATE 43 9 COLOR 4 PRINT Press ESC Key COLOR 0 SND KY IN AS INKEYS IF AS lt gt CHRS amp H1B THEN SND KY IN LV3 END LOCATE 0 12 PRINT SPACES 79 FOR 1 0 TO 10 LOCATE 39 1I PRINT SPACES 40 NEXT I COTOCATUM Li a wees Return to Sub menu FPROSEND sae End routine COM 1 OFF CLOSE V cece cece eee ccee Close communication port CONSOLE 0 25 0 1 CLS 3 END ESEND tiara ere wid iets ave elaielece Send command routine SNDS CHRS amp H1B MIDS SENDS 6 PRINT 1 SND
103. 5 3 5L Fork AWG22 to 18 0 3 to 0 75mm 51 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 6 Wiring Method For the connections between the PC and NT20S units wire as shown below The wiring method differs depending on the cables used for connection e RS 422A connection C200HX HG HE OMRON PC While controlling machinery and monitoring lines controls the NT20S units when necessary C200H HG HE can be used RS 232C cable max length 2 m or directly connected RS 422A cable RS 232C RS 422A RS 232C RS 422A RS 232C RS 422A RS 232C RS 422A converter unit converter unit converter unit converter unit type NT ALO01 type NT AL001 type NT AL001 type NT ALO01 RS 422A cable RS 422A cable B RS 422A cable RS 232C RS 422A converter unit type NT AL001 RS 232C cable RS 232C cable RS 232C cable RS 232C cable max length 2 m max length 2 m max length 2 m max length 2 m Total cable length 500 m RS 232C Cable Wiring PT PC NT AL001 Abbrev Pin No Pin No Abbrev Connector Connector cover cover SD 2 2 SD RS 232C RD 3 3 RD RS 232C interface RS 4 4 RS interface CS 5 5 CS 5V 6 6 5V SG 9 9 SG The pin numbers are the numbers at the Shielding Only connectediab RG NT20S For the pin numbers at the PC wire refer to the manual for the PC used 52 Connect
104. 6 Comm check 00 0 0 e eee eae 101 102 Comm type coccccccccc nennen 75 Communication is automatically reset 84 Communication procedure 201 Comparison between NT20S and NT20M 7 Compatibility 00 reem eaa spewed ota 5 Compatible PCs o o o 32 45 49 Connecting cables oooooooomoo 275 Connecting the NT20S 34 46 49 Connector 000 eee eee eens 34 Connector cover 0 cece eee 275 Connector specifications 257 Connector S so nce en Peet eee Ri eee deeds 275 Content upgrade memory table 188 Continuous buzzer 00 eee 193 Continuous screens 123 140 159 161 Continuous Sound 00 eee ee 93 125 Contrast control 0 000 c cee eee eee 23 Control bits tic ace d coder eine Stade cen 181 Controlling the NT20S status 154 191 Controlling the display elements 153 Copy memory table o o oooo oo o 207 Copy memory table setting 174 COPY YPE wees ienet Ea pecan Med ee 174 175 Copying the memory table 174 Creating numeric keys 20005 143 Creating screen data 0 0000 113 Crimp terminals 0 00 cece 30 Currently displayed screen word 160 161 D DIP SW status oooocccccoccc 109 DIP switch 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 24 42 DIP switch
105. 600 bps DM6551 a A 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity baud rate 19200 bps DM6553 0000 Unit No O e When using CPM1 Host link mode DM6650 0001 Set the conditions with the contents of DM 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity baud rate 9600 bps DM6651 z gt 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity baud rate 19200 bps DM6653 0000 Unit No O 44 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 1 Section 2 5 2 5 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 1 Connect the NT20S ST121 EV3 to an OMRON PC by the NT link method To connect the NT20S to a PC by the NT link 1 1 method the NT20S memory switch for host communication must be set for the NT link For the host commu nication setting refer to Selecting of the Host Communication Method page 78 2 5 1 Compatible PCs Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the host link function built in Inthe C200HX HG HE series there are CPU units that can support host link connec tions by installing an expansion communication board When making a connection check the series and model of the PC to which the connection is being made and the type of host link unit that is installed The follow ing is a list of the PCs that can be connected to the NT20S via a host link The compatible PCs are listed in the table below CPU Units Connectable PC Series CPU Unit Using an Expansion Connectable to Communication Board CPM1
106. AMPLE PROGRAM Section 6 7 EXAMPLE PROGRAM 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk OPERATION COMMAND EXAMPLE PROGRAM NT20S ST128 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk a ai TRA AAA E GR AAA AA AAA Draw screen frame SECT 9 DIM CMND SECT 10 1 CMND SECT TS B 31 SCREEN 3 CLS 3 CONSOLE 15 10 0 0 LINE 0 176 639 176 7 amp HFOFO LINE 159 0 159 176 7 amp HFOFO LINE 300 0 300 176 7 amp HFOFO LINE 0 16 159 16 7 amp HFOFO LINE 0 96 159 96 7 amp HFOFO LINE 0 112 159 112 7 amp HFOFO LINE 520 176 520 224 7 amp HFOFO LINE 0 223 639 224 7 B COLOR 0 LOCATE 2 0 PRINT OPERATING COMMANDS COLOR 0 LOCATE 2 6 PRINT TERMINAL COMMANDS CMND 0 SECT co cc ccc c cece ccc cece cccccce Set display character strings FOR I 1 TO SECT READ CMNDS 0 1 0 NEXT I FOR I 1 TO SECT READ CMND 1I FOR J 1 TO CMND I READ CMNDS 1 J 0 CMNDS 1 J 1 IF CMNDS 1 J 1 THEN CMNDS 1 J 1 ESC CHRS 8H22 NEXT J NEXT I RY 15 ON COM 1 GOSUB RECV cooooooooooooo Set receive interrupt routine OPEN COM1 E81NN AS 1 ooooooo oo Open communication port NT20S_SETTING OF S
107. Abort touch switch on the NT20S when the screen data transmission is completed Unless this touch switch is pressed the screen data will not be correct ly registered Ifthe Abort touch switch is pressed during transmission the screen data will not be correctly registered If screen data cannot be transmitted from the support tool confirm normal commu nication between the NT20S and the support tool Personal computer Use the tool communication check function in the Maintenance Mode of the NT20S to check communication with the support tool Refer to Checking the Communica tions with the Support Tool on page 100 Precautions to be Observed During the Screen Data Transmission When any of the following or a system error occurs during the screen data trans mission the transmitted screen data will not be registered correctly to the NT20S If an error message is displayed in the System Menu and the RUN Mode cannot be selected the screen data memory needs to be initialized e The power to the NT20S is interrupted or reset e The power to the computer on which the support tool is running is interrupted or reset e The cable connecting the NT20S to the computer on which the support tool is running is interrupted or reset e The Abort touch switch on the NT20S screen is pressed to end the transmis sion e The ESC key on the support tool is pressed to end the transmission When the power to the NT20S is turned ON or r
108. C200HS C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU32 E C200H LK201 V1 C200HE CPU42 E E PUA E C200HE C series C200HG CPU33 E C200HG CPU43 E C200HG CPU43 E C200H LK201 V1 C200HG CPU63 E C200HG CPU53 E C200HG C200HG CPU63 E C200HX CPU34 E C200HX CPU44 E C200HX CPU44 E ad N C200HX CPU64 E C200HX CPU54 E C200HX C200HX CPU64 E C500 LK201 V1 C500 F C500 LK203 C1000H F C2000 H CPM1 10CDR CPM1 20CDR CPM1 CPM1 30CDR CQM1 CPU21 E CQM1 CPU41 E CQM1 CPU42 E CQM1 CQM1 CPU43 E CQM1 CPU44 E 32 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 4 Units with Built in Host Link Function i PC Series CPU Units Connectable Using an Connectable to Host Link Unit CPU Unit Expansion Communication Board CV500 LK201 cv500 CPU01 EV1 VSD CV series CV500 LK201 cv1000 CPU01 Ev1 Cvt000 CV500 LK201 cv2000 CPU01 Ev1 Cv2000 CVM1 CPU01 EV CVM1 series CV500 LK201 CVM1 CPU11 EV CVM1 CVM1 CPU21 EV Connection is not possible to the CPU units of CVM1 CV series PCs that do not have the suffix EV In the case of these CPU units make the connection to NT20S by using a host link unit 33 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 4 2 4 2 Connecting the NT20S Refer to the illustrations below to select the appropriate cable for the unit connec tors and connect the NT20S to the PC Host To make a connector cable refer to Appendix G Method
109. COTE a Write 4 digit number LOCATE 43 0 INPUT Numeral table M NAGAIN LOCATE 43 1 INPUT Write 1 to 4 digit number N IF N lt 999 OR N gt 9999 THEN GOTO NAGAIN IF N lt 0 THEN S F ELSE S MS RIGHTS 00 HEXS M 3 N3 ABS N3 NS STRS N3 NS RIGHTS NS LEN NS 1 IF S lt gt F THEN N RIGHTS 000 N RIGHTS 00 N 3 SEND SENDS M S NS RETURN RESCIDO Piera Write 8 digit number LOCATE 43 0 INPUT Numeral table 7 M N8AGAIN LOCATE 43 1 PRINT SPACES 36 LOCATE 43 1 INPUT Write 1 to 8 digit number N N INT N IF N lt 9999999 OR N7 gt 99999999 THEN GOTO N8AGAIN IF N lt 0 THEN S F ELSE S MS RIGHTS 00 HEXS M 3 N ABS N NS STRS N NS RIGHTS NS LEN NS 1 IF S lt gt F THEN NS RIGHTS 0000000 NS 8 ELSE N RIGHTS 000000 NS 7 SEND SENDS M S NS RETURN RESCILE T rasos ca das Copy memory table LOCATE 43 0 INPUT 0 character string 1l number MS IF M lt gt 0 AND M lt gt 1 THEN ESC 2F LOCATE 43 1 INPUT Copy source memory table number S LOCATE 43 2 INPUT Copy destination memory table number D S STRS S3 S RIGHTS S LEN S 1 SS RIGHTS 00 S 3 D STRS D DS RIGHTS D LEN D 1 DS RIGHTS 00 D 3 SENDS SENDS M S D RETURN SEK Ti ds Display lamps and touch switches bits FOR I 0 TO 31 TS B 1 1 NEXT I FOR I 0 TO 31 LOCATE 65 I MOD 8 3 1 8 PRINT RIGHTS STR 1 2 NEX
110. Connect the CPU unit with an I O connection cable The following restrictions ap ply when making this connection e A maximum of one CPU unit can be connected e Up to two I O units can be connected for the one CPU unit but I O extension units cannot be connected e Itis not possible to connect a COOH I O unit after the NT20S It must be the final connection in the system CPU unit I O connection cable C20H CNOO2 1 0 connection cable C20H CNOL12 1 O unit Max 2 units 1 0 connection cable NT20M CNP 2 C20H CN 2 Host interface connector When connecting a C H always install a noise filter 1 Insert the noise filter in the power supply line of the COOH 2 Makethe distance between the noise filter and the C Has short as possible and separate it from the power supply line 3 Install the noise filter case on the FG face 4 Use aZGB2202 01U manufacutred by TDK or equivalent as the noise filter Noise filter gt Y 24V y IN OUT 24V 2 3 E 61 Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication Section 2 7 2 7 3 Power ON Power OFF 62 Switching the Power ON OFF When Using C2
111. Copying the memory table page 174 In indirect specification a numeral memory table is specified to display a numeri cal value or character string The numerical value stored in this numeral memory table 39 in the figure below is taken as the number of the memory table whose contents are to be displayed Either of the following two methods can be used to change the display when indi rect specification is used 1 Changing the memory table number for the memory table whose contents are to be displayed Inthe example in the figure below this would mean changing the contents of numeral memory table 41 2 Changing the contents of the memory table used for display Inthe example in the figure below this would mean changing the contents of character string memory table 39 Here the method for changing the display using method 1 is explained For de tails on method 2 see the explanations on direct specification page 169 and co pying memory tables page 174 Indirect Allocated word numeral memory table 41 numeral memory table 41 aabb 0039 0 0 3 9 Je 0039 Character string memory table 39 AaBb Character string memory table 40 Moji Reference This method is convenient when switching the display at the same location for example when monitoring a series of words or when using un
112. Easy to read screen even in direct sunlight The monochrome mode liquid crystal display of ST16L models is even easier to read e The angle of visibility is equal to that of NT20M DT131 e lts backlight unit can be replaced at the operation site e Conforms to IP65 waterproof requirements 256 dots 128 dots Wide angle of visibility 35 A Host Link I F Unit Screen Data Memory and a System ROM are All Incorporated e With the NT link communication method 1 1 and 1 N connections are possible e There is no complicated installation work except a simple connection to a Host e Aflash memory is used for the screen data memory There is no need of backup battery e The following communication systems are standard for each model NT20S ST121 EV3 ST161 EV3 Host link direct and NT link NT20S ST122 V1 C200H direct communication NT20S ST128 ST168 RS 232C communication command control e NT20S ST121 EV3 ST161 EV3 can be connected to Mitsubishi FX series and Mitsubishi A series PCs Refer to PC Connection Operation Manual VO42 E1 Section 1 2 Functions of NT20S The System Menu can be displayed by using the touch switches located in four Touch Switch Operation corners of the screen Compatibility with NT20M Existing screen data user programs are compatible Functions of NT20S Section 1 2 1 2 2 Principal Functions of NT20S Functions Related to the Data Display
113. Functions page 139 Various System Settings Section 3 8 Types of the Buzzer Sounds Reference Setting the Buzzer The following buzzer sounds can be set e Continuous sound The buzzer continues to sound e Intermittent sound The buzzer sounds intermittently at constant intervals If both the continuous buzzer and the intermittent buzzer are instructed by the Host the continuous buzzer will sound Use the memory switches to set whether or not the buzzer sounds when the buzz er sound has been instructed by the Host or with a screen attribute or when an error has occurred The factory setting is ON which means that the buzzer will sound when a com mand is received from the host when a screen for which the buzzer attribute is set is displayed and when errors occur Set the buzzer sound by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Repeatedly pressing the Buzz MEMORY SW MENU 1 2 er Sound touch switch cycles Comm Type Host Link through the setting options ON ERR ON and OFF in Key Sound OFF thatorder Buzzer Sound OFF y The figure to the left shows the Bk light Off None N
114. HG CPU33 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HG CPU43 E selectable 9 pin C200HG C200HG CPU53 E C200HG CPU63 E C200HX CPU34 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HX CPU44 E selectable 9 pin C200HX C200HX CPU54 E C200HX CPU64 E CV500 CPU01 V1 EV1 Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections CV500 CV1000 CPU01 V1 EV1 CV1000 CV2000 CPU01 V1 EV1 CV2000 CVM1 CPU01 V1 EV CVM1 series CVM1 CPU11 V1 EV CVM1 CPU21 EV Note For CPU units marked a communications board is required CPUs For Connection Via an NT Link 1 N Model JO man JO PO pe C200HE CPU32 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HE CPU42 E selectable 9 pin C200HE C200HG CPU33 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HG CPU43 E selectable 9 pin C200HG C200HG CPU53 E C200HG CPU63 E C200HX CPU34 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HX CPU44 E selectable 9 pin C200HX C200HX CPU54 E C200HX CPU64 E Note For CPU units marked a communications board is required 273 Model List Appendix J CPU Unit Connection by C200H Direct Communication DR DE V1 DR DE V1 DR DE V1 DR DE V1 C200H CPUO1 E C200H CPU03 E C200H CPU11 E C200H CPU21 E SADUN C200H CPU23 E C200H CPU31 E C200HS CPU01 E C200
115. HS CPU03 E C200HS CPU21 E C200HS CPU23 E C200HS C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU11 E C200HE CPU32 E C200HE C200HG CPU33 E C200HG CPU43 E C200HG CPUS3 E ven C200HG CPU63 E C200HX CPU34 E C200HX CPU44 E C200HX CPU54 E ee C200HX CPU64 E RS 232C RS 422A Converter Unit IIS EEN TS NT AL001 RS 232C 9 pin connector RS 422A 8 pin terminal block RS 232C Adapter IN ETT Connect the RS 232C port of the NT20S and the peripheral PM1 CREO port of the CPM1 274 Model List Appendix J Related Parts and Equipment for PT Name mor mas O Support Tool NT ZA3AT EV2 3 5 inch FD for NT Series Options NT20S CFLO1 Replaceable backlight NT20M KBA04 Reflection suppressing protective sheet Parts Used for Connection Cables with connectors Model Cable Length Applicable Units Communication Method XW22Z 200T Host link units and CPU units with Host link XW2Z 500T 9 pin connectors NT link 1 to 1 C200H CN711 C200H CN221 C200HX HG HE C200H CN521 C200H direct communication C200H CN131 C20H CN712 NT20M CNP222 E ak Connecting cables for host link NT link RS 232C Specification at Multiconductor shielded cable FUJIKURA Ltd IFVV SB CO MA VV SB Multiconductor shielded cable HITACHI Cable Ltd 5P x 28AWG Applicable connectors for host link NT link RS 232C Name Moa Connector XM2A 2501 25 pin manufactured by OMRON XM2A 0901 9 pin Plug manufactur
116. INT Pressed touch switch number TS 0 FOR I 0 TO 13 S VAL amp H MIDS RCV 3 1 2 2 FOR J 0 TO 7 IF S MOD 2 1 THEN PRINT TS S S 2 TS TS 1 NEXT J 1 PRINT PRINT GOTO RCV END ESCs Pt ite eve id ts O a Notify lamp and touch switch status IF R CODES lt gt S THEN GOTO RCV ERR PRINT Lamp touch switch number VAL amp H MID RCV 4 2 M VAL MIDS RCVS 3 1 IF M 0 THEN M 0FF ELSE IF M 1 THEN M 0N ELSE M INVERSE PRINT Display status MS PRINT GOTO RCV END RCV ERR PRINT Receive data error PRINT RCV END RY CSRLIN LOCATE SX SY NORCV RETURN FRESCO cascara asas Display specified screen LOCATE 43 0 INPUT Screen number M MS RIGHTS 000 HEXS M 4 SENDS SENDS M RETURN WES Sr oiacelerenevalece Gress Quduoiava taraseeisvece Screen enquiry RETURN RE SC eB cr aa oreo Write character screen LOCATE 43 0 INPUT Character screen memory table number M LOCATE 43 1 PRINT Write character string MAX 32 CHARACTERS gt LOCATE 43 2 INPUT C MS RIGHTS 0 HEX M 2 CS LEFTS C 32 L RIGHTS 0 HEX LEN C 2 EXAMPLE PROGRAM Section 6 7 2820 2830 2840 2850 2860 2870 2880 2890 2900 2910 2920 2930 2940 2950 2960 2970 2980 2990 3000 3010 3020 3030 3040 3050 3060 3070 3080 3090 3100 3110 3120 3130 3140 3150 3160 3170 3180 3190 3200 3210 3220 3230 3240 3250 3260 3270 SENDS SENDS LS MS CS RETURN ES
117. Link Relay Timer Counter Area IR Area HR Area 1 AR Area Area Area CV500 CVM1 CPU01 VC 0000 to 2555 0000 to 0511 0000 to 0511 0000 to 6655 DM Area 0000 to 8191 CV1000 CVM1 CPU011 V 0000 to 9999 Cv2000 0000 to 2555 0000 to 0511 0000 to 1023 2 CVM1 CPU21 V 1 Included in the IR area in the case of CVM1 CV series PCs 2 This is the area that can be used with an NT20S The DM area itself occupies the range 00000 to 24575 278 Special Characters Appendix M APPENDIX M Special Characters English Character Codes Pin 2 of SW2 must be ON to enable English language messages to use the following codes Example Hex code is represented by 30 decimal code by 48 and character by 0 cui 48 Code 20 and 32 in the table represents a space as indicated by SP ist 2nd SP RA te pa Mo AAE 50 114 130 146 51 115 131 EEE EN a z ps 149 95 149 a fe pa Ere q a 86 102 118 134 150 a e e 151 j 4 7 N EGE apa a EJ 120 pa Zoe a 121 ES o 106 122 138 154 geg erie fate 75 107 123 139 155 108 124 140 156 Mia are Joa E2 109 125 141 157 OE pele fe par apea j iii diz E i a C BE EN EN HD wl OD om amp Wlall aa ol al ao aya a of ajo a wo a o wo TN My my O QO Of DW oO PIN Of Oo O OI NT ALO
118. M1 CV series EVL Set the operating conditions with the PC System Setting functions when a C H CVM1 CV series host link unit is connected to the NT20S The PC sys tem settings can be made directly from the peripheral tool LSS etc or the PC system setting information created with a peripheral tool can be transferred to the CPU The following describes the switch settings so as to enable the PC system set tings For the details of the PC system settings refer to the SYSMAC COOH User s Manual Programming W176 E1 L and the CVM1 CV500 CV1000 CV2000 User s Manual W195 E1 L 1 C series COOH C20H C28H C40H C60H No switch settings are required when connecting to a C series COH CPU 2 CVM1 CV series CV500 CPUO1 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CPU01 EV CVM1 CPU11 EV CVM1 CPU21 EV Only CVM1 CV series CPU units designated EV1 or higher can be con nected When connecting to a CVM1 CV series CPU set the switches as given be low Setting the front switches m l O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C System setting DIP SW4 To effect the existing DIP switch settings set SW4 to ON To effect the existing PC system settings set SW4 to OFF Note In the case of CPU units manufactured before June 1995 lo
119. NT series Programmable Terminal Operation Manual Cat No VO20 E3 2 OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PC means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else The abbreviation Host means PC that controls NT20S Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of in formation Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 1997 1998 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permis sion of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual
120. NT20S to enable high speed control from the PC Usually the only data read from the PC area the elements used for the currently displayed screen Even if the con tents of the PC words allocated to memory tables are changed these contents are not updated at the PT unless the memory table is used for the displayed screen NT20S PT processing Details of processing PT power ON Y Initial processing Hardware check communication status check etc executed Operation start When the values registered in the NT20S are used as the initial PT PC values in the memory tables these values are written into the allocated words of the PC Y Initial values written to the memory tables Screen switching y In order to enable fast batch processing the elements used in Screen element registration PT gt PC the displayed screen are registered in the PC in advance Approximately 120 words can be registered per screen _ Y Reading of registered PT lt PC The statuses of the registered elements are read from the PC elements PT PC and the display is changed Ba Y O ea The status of the elements that were in excess of the registrable tl eae PT PC number and could not be registered is read from the PC and vec j the display is changed This processing is continued until the registered ae wep ee ee ee ee statuses of all the remaining
121. P SW2 1 to SW2 4 Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps 0 OFF 1 0N e 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to O 1 to N e Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled e CTS selection selector switch Set this always to 0V ON 39 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 4 40 e CPU mounted type C120 LK201 V1 Setting the rear switches Unit parity and transfer code DIP SW1 1 to SW1 5 Set SW1 1 to SW1 5 to OFF 0 Parity is fixed at Even Parity Transfer code is fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits Baud rate DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps 0 OFF 1 0N 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to 0 1 to N Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled CTS selection DIP SW3 1 and SW3 2 Set SW3 1 to ON 1 and SW3 2 to OFF 0 Set this always to OV Synchronization DIP SW3 3 to SW3 6 Set SW3 3 SW3 5 and SW3 6 to ON 1 and SW3 4 to OFF 0 Set these to Internal Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 4 e CVM1 CV series backplate mounted type CV500 LK201 Setting the front switches
122. RETURN PRE CV 2 a a ada Receive interrupt routine IF LOC 1 0 THEN GOTO NORCV SX POS 0 SY CSRLIN LINE INPUT 1 RCV LOCATE 0 RY COLOR 0 PRINT ESC MID RCVS 2 R CODE MIDS RCV 2 1 ESC Y ia is E cae Notify screen number IF R CODES lt gt Y THEN GOTO ESC E PRINT Screen Number VAL 8H MIDS RCVS 3 4 PRINT GOTO RCV END RESCUE a a aa Notify 4 digit number IF R CODES lt gt E THEN GOTO ESC F PRINT Numeral table VAL 8SH MID RCVS 3 3 PRINT Input decimal value VAL MIDS RCVS 6 4 PRINT GOTO RCV END ESCE ir as Notify 8 digit number IF R CODES lt gt F THEN GOTO ESC H PRINT Numeral table VAL amp H MID RCVS 3 3 IF MIDS RCVS 6 1 F THEN NN 0 VAL MIDS RCV 7 7 ELSE NN VAL MIDS RCV 6 8 PRINT Input decimal value NN PRINT GOTO RCV END 225 EXAMPLE PROGRAM Section 6 7 2360 2370 2380 2390 2400 2410 2420 2430 2440 2450 2460 2470 2480 2490 2500 2510 2520 2530 2540 2550 2560 2570 2580 2590 2600 2610 2620 2630 2640 2650 2660 2670 2680 2690 2700 2710 2720 2730 2740 2750 2760 2770 2780 2790 2800 2810 226 RESCH aia Notify touch switch number IF R CODES lt gt H THEN GOTO ESC J PRINT Pressed touch switch number VAL amp H MIDS RCVS 3 3 PRINT GOTO RCV END FESC Je ant alate 0 0 ia eco relerere sete ere Notify touch switch bit IF R CODES lt gt J THEN GOTO ESC S PR
123. RS 232C connector cable The following are the recommended cables manufactured by OMRON Connector Specification Model Cable Length If a Cable Longer Than 5 m is Required Ifa cable longerthan 5 mis required a connector cable will have to be made Refer to Appendix F Method for Makingthe Cable for Connection to the Host page 256 The maximum transmission distance is 15 m When Long Distance Transmission is Required 46 When transmission over a distance exceeding the RS 232C specification is re quired it can be achieved by using an RS 232C RS 422A converter unit type NT AL001 to switch to RS 422A communication RS 485 communication cannot be used For details refer to Connecting to an RS 232C RS 422A Converter Unit 1 1 page 269 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 1 Section 2 5 2 5 3 PC Switch Settings When the NT20S and PC are connected to each other set the conditions at the PC CPU so as to enable the NT link communications The following is a general description of switch settings e C series C200HS C200HX HG HE CPM1 CQM1 Set the operating conditions to the PC system setting area when a C200HS C200HX HG HE CPM1 or CQM1 CPU is connected to the NT20S The PC sys tem setting area data memory can be directly accessed from the peripheral tool LSS etc The following describes the switch settings so as to enable the PC system set tings For the details of the operation with the PC syst
124. S can be ascertained e NT20S operating stopped status Whether the NT20S is active or inactive e Screen number Number of the screen currently displayed e Numeral setting input Whether or not numerical values have been input by nu meral setting For details on how these NT20S operating statuses are actually detected refer to Section 5 5 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC Determining the NT20S Operating Status on page 196 Screen Number Response on page 205 and 8 digit Number Input Notify on page 212 To ensure system safety be sure to periodically read the PT operating status bit from the host in order to ensure that the PT is always operating normally 121 Screen Display Section 4 3 4 3 Screen Display This section describes the screen information required for the operation with the NT20S For details on how to change the displayed screen refer to Switching the Screen Display on page 157 and Display Specified Screen on page 204 For the meth ods used to ascertain the screen number of the screen currently displayed refer to Notifying the Display Screen to the PC To Display the Number of Currently Dis played Screen on page 160 and Request Screen Number on page 204 4 3 1 Classification of Screens Normal Screen Overlapping Screen 122 The NT20S is provided with the following types of screens which are classified by the display method e Normal screen
125. SENDS N RETURN MEG CU T anota solerere eievers Disable inputs SENDS S SENDS 0 RETURN FESC V sd Enables inputs SEND SEND 0 RETURN ESC P Canis Display screen LOCATE 43 0 PRINT Controlled item LOCATE 43 1 PRINT 0 Display LOCATE 43 2 PRINT 1 No display PAGAIN LOCATE 43 3 INPUT MS EXAMPLE PROGRAM Section 6 7 3740 3750 3760 3770 3780 3790 3800 3810 3820 3830 3840 3850 3860 3870 3880 3890 3900 3910 3920 3930 3940 3950 3960 3970 3980 3990 4000 4010 4020 4030 4040 4050 4060 4070 4080 4090 4100 4110 4120 4130 4140 4150 4160 4170 4180 4190 IF M lt gt 0 AND M lt gt 1 THEN GOTO PAGAIN SEND SENDS M RETURN ESCENA ii AA E AA Buzzer control LOCATE 43 0 PRINT Controlled item LOCATE 43 1 PRINT 0 Stop buzzer LOCATE 43 2 PRINT 1 Continuous buzzer LOCATE 43 3 PRINT 2 Intermittent buzzer TAGAIN LOCATE 43 4 INPUT MS IF M lt gt 0 AND MS lt gt 1 AND M lt gt 2 THEN GOTO TAGAIN SENDS SENDS MS RETURN HES CW Pros cane ae System menu display LOCATE 43 0 PRINT Controlled item LOCATE 43 1 PRINT 0 MENU TRANSFER ENABLE LOCATE 43 2 PRINT 1 MENU TRANSFER DISABLE WAGAIN LOCATE 43 3 INPUT MS IF M lt gt 0 AND M lt gt 1 THEN GOTO WAGAIN SENDS SENDS M RETURN FESCIOZLO oF a a ia a Clear screen RETURN FESCLO T meie aE AE E E Specify 1l byte c
126. ST121 EV3 Host link PT SETTING PT Control Area DMO0000 PT Notify Area DM0010 Comm Type Host Link Baud Rate 9600bps EXIT NT Link 1 N PT SETTING PT Control Area DMO0000 PT Notify Area DM0010 Comm Type NT Link 1 N Unit No 7 EXIT NT20S ST122 V1 C200H direct communication PT SETTING PT Control Area PT Notify Area Comm Type Unit No EXIT If no unit number is set at the PC O will be displayed Section 3 9 NT Link 1 1 PT SETTING PT Control Area DMO0000 PT Notify Area DM0010 Comm Type NT Link EXIT NT20S ST128 RS 232C PT SETTING Data Bits 8bits Stop Bits 1bit Parity Check Even Flow Control RS CS Baud Rate 19200bps e The current PT settings will be displayed e Pressing the EXIT touch switch will exit the PT settings display and the NT20S will return to the RUN Mode 108 System Maintenance Section 3 9 3 9 3 Checking the NT20S DIP Switch Settings Display the NT20S DIP switch settings by using the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu as mentioned below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select DIP SW Status MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch DIP SWITCH STATUS 1 Forced Init No 2 Message Mode English 3 Mode Change E
127. SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch MEMORY SW MENU Comm Type Key Sound Buzzer Sound Bk light Off Tool Mode 1 2 Repeatedly pressing the Comm Type touch switch Host Link causes the setting to cycle OFF through the options Host link NT link and NT Link 1 N in OFF that order None NT20M To set and quit the menu press the WRT amp EXIT touch switch To quit without set ting press Quit Reference The communication method must be selected according to the method that the connecting PC supports Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC Host with Memory Switches Section 3 5 3 5 2 Selecting the Host Link Communication Speed NT20S ST121 EV3 only When using the NT20S ST121 EV3 with the host link the baud rate of the com munications with the PC can be set Use the Baud Rate switch and select 9600 bps or 19200 bps The factory setting has been made at 9600 bps Select the baud rate of the communication with the PC by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode
128. Smoothing The characters and marks enlarged to the x4 scale or larger are displayed with the outline automatically smoothed This function is called smoothing e Reverse and flashing display Reverse display The display brightness of the character and the background is reversed comparing with the normal display Flashing display Characters are displayed as they flash The normal display alternates with no display Reverse and flashing display The reverse display alternates with the normal display 4 4 2 Numeral Memory Table Displaying a Numeral The numeral memory table is an NT20S internal memory used to store the numer al data Up to 128 numeral memory tables can be used and up to eight digits four bytes of numeral data including signs can be stored in one numeral memory table The numeral memory tables at up to 50 positions can be registered in one screen The numeral memory tables are registered with table numbers 0 to 127 When creating the screen data by using the support tool set the position on the screen to display a numeral and also set a numeral number to be displayed When the NT20S is operated the screen displays the contents of the numeral memory table For details on how to change the currently displayed numeric data refer to Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words on page 169 and 4 digit Write Numeral Memory Table on page 206
129. T ALOO1 Communication board 11 Us de RS 422A ore cable Total cable length 500 m RS 232C cable RS 232C cable RS 232C cable max 2 m max 2 m max 2 m RS 485 connection RS 485 at the PC side T End connection C200HX HG HE RS 485 cable RS 232C RS 422A converter unit converter unit RS 232C RS 422A type NT AL001 type NT AL001 converter unit p A type NT AL001 i E K U sass Y Total cable length 500 m RS 232C RS 422A 4 End connection Communication board cable RS 232C cable RS 232C cable RS 232C cable max 2 m max 2 m max 2 m 56 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 6 2 6 3 PC Switch Settings When the PC and NT20S units have been connected set the switches at the CPU module at the PC side in order to enable communication using the NT link method e C series C200HX HG HE Write the communication conditions directly to the PC system area data memory using a peripheral tool e g SYSMAC support software For details on the operation for setting the PC system area refer to the SYSMAC C200HX HG HE Installation Guide W302 E1 L PC system setting area setting With C200HX HG HE the setting area differs according to which port among the stan
130. T I LOCATE 43 5 PRINT Input Inverse Input Run input 99 Execute ESC K 2 COLOR O LOCATE 43 6 PRINT SPACES 36 LOCATE 43 6 INPUT Lamp touch switch number N 227 EXAMPLE PROGRAM Section 6 7 3280 3290 3300 3310 3320 3330 3340 3350 3360 3370 3380 3390 3400 3410 3420 3430 3440 3450 3460 3470 3480 3490 3500 3510 3520 3530 3540 3550 3560 3570 3580 3590 3600 3610 3620 3630 3640 3650 3660 3670 3680 3690 3700 3710 3720 3730 228 IF N 99 THEN GOTO ESC K 3 IF N lt 0 OR N gt 31 THEN GOTO ESC K 2 TS B N TS B N 1 COLOR 2 TS B N 2 LOCATE 65 N MOD 8 3 N 8 PRINT RIGHTS STRS N 2 GOTO ESC K 2 ESC K 3 FOR I 0 TO 3 M 0 FOR J 0 TO 7 IF TS B 1 8 J 1 THEN M M 2 J NEXT J SENDS SENDS RIGHTS 0 HEX M 2 NEXT I COLOR 0 RETURN El ol Opry ia a ias Display lamps and touch switches number LOCATE 43 0 PRINT Display specification LOCATE 43 1 PRINT 0 OFF LOCATE 43 2 PRINT 1 ON LOCATE 43 3 PRINT 2 Inverse flashing lamps only LOCATE 43 4 PRINT 3 All ON QAGAIN LOCATE 43 5 INPUT MS IF M lt gt 0 AND M lt gt 1 AND M lt gt 2 AND M lt gt 3 THEN GOTO QAGAIN LOCATE 43 6 INPUT Lamp touch switch number N N RIGHTS 00 HEXS N 2 SENDS SENDS MS NS RETURN RE GOR aii a ii aos Enquire lamp and touch switch status LOCATE 43 0 INPUT Lamp touch switch number N N RIGHTS 00 HEXS N 2 SEND
131. T statu lt Numeral setting strobe flag Allocated word numeral table 1 12345678 Start Start 1 Content upgrade memory table in the PT status notify area and PT status 15 14 1312111098 765 4 3 2 1 0 Bit T T 0 Numerl memory table BCD 3 digits Content upgrade memory table PT status 0 0 PT status SA 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Bit olol ololo PT status i Numeral memory table 000 to 127 Numeral setting strobe flag Data is written to the content upgrade memory table as three digits of BCD binary coded decimal data Whenthe numeral setting strobe flag bit has been notified to the PC it returns tothe OFF 0 status For details on the method for storing a number in the word allocated for the numer al memory table see Displaying the Contents of Allocated Words of Memory Tables page 167 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 5 3 e Restrictions on allocating words The PT status notify area can be allocated to the PC memory areas listed in the following table m foame O oann O ox remates O InenatSpecalmeay 0 arme fr A er fom J x fom HR G O S AR Ronan Relay O pens m wres o fp O OK x NG Since all the CVM1 CV series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the system they cannot be used for applications not related to the system The range of each memory area differs according to the PC typ
132. T128 DATA BIT LENGTH 8 BITS STOP BIT LENGTH 1 BIT PARITY ODD FLOW CONTROL RS CS BAUD RATE VALUE SET BY SWITCH COMMAND COM 1 ON ZEVO o iia E E ole acetare ates Main Menu LV 0 SECT NO 0 SEL NO 1 GOSUB SELECT IF SEL NO 0 THEN GOTO PRO END 223 EXAMPLE PROGRAM Section 6 7 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740 1750 1760 1770 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 224 SECT NO SEL NO ATV A A ti NAAA A AAA Sub menu LV 1 SEL NO 1 GOSUB SELECT IF SEL NO 0 THEN GOTO LVO RUVZ E ca caes Branch according to command parameter input COM 1 STOP LV 2 SENDS CMNDS SECT NO SEL NO 1 SECT1 IF SECT NO lt gt 1 THEN GOTO SECT2 ON SEL NO GOSUB ESC 0 ESC X SECT2 IF SECT NO lt gt 2 THEN GOTO SECT3 ON SEL NO GOSUB ESC B ESC C ESC D ESC 2F SECT3 IF SECT NO lt gt 3 THEN GOTO SECT4 ON SEL NO GOSUB ESC K ESC Q ESC R SECT4 IF SECT NO lt gt 4 THEN GOTO SECT5 ON SEL NO GOSUB ESC U ESC V SECT5 IF SECT NO lt gt 5 THEN GOTO SECT6 ON SEL NO GOSUB ESC P ESC T ESC W SECT6 IF SECT NO lt gt 6 THEN GOTO SECT7 ON SEL NO GOSUB ESC 26 ESC 29 ESC 2A SECT7 IF SECT NO lt gt 7 THEN GOTO SECT8 ON SEL NO GOSUB ESC 21 ESC 22 ESC 23 ESC 24 ESC 25 SECT8 IF SECT NO lt gt 8 THEN GOTO SECT9 ON SEL NO GOSUB ESC 2B ESC
133. T20S 6 7 1 Use of Programs The sample program appears as follows on the screen Menu bar Sub menu Parameter input column Send command column gt Run confirm column Receive command display column Use the program as shown below Execute program gt Y Interrupt display when ESC Select type of send command received command ESC ESC Main Menu y Select send command Sub menu Input parameter Input parameter column Send command column Confirm send command 3 confirm execution y Execute transfer command Up Down Left Right keys select item ENT confirm Esc stop Y End program 1 This sample program is written in N88BASIC 86 NEC for a PC 9801 computer Modify this program for use with any other computer lan guage or computer such as an IBM PC AT or compatible 2 The interval between parameter input and command transmission is a hold interval for interrupt processing of the received command If an in terrupt is permitted between the interval of parameter input and a com mand is received all subsequent receive interrupts are displaced If this occurs send an enquiry command to read all the accumulated receive data 3 When a parameter is input no check is made that the parameter is in the permitted range Make sure that parameters are input within the per mitted range 222 EX
134. T20S ST121 EV3 screen Tool Mode NT20M 93 Various System Settings Section 3 8 To set and quit the menu press the WRT8 EXIT touch switch To quit without set ting press Quit e OFF The buzzer will not sound at all during the operation e When ON is set the buzzer will sound when a command is received from the host when a screen for which the buzzer attribute is set is displayed and when errors occur e When ERR ON has been set the buzzer will sound only when an error has occurred Reference The buzzer will sound when Buzzer check is selected in the Maintenance Mode regardless of the buzzer setting 3 8 3 Backlight OFF Function Turning on the Backlight The NT20S has a function that turns off the backlight of the LCD panel to maximize its service life if no operation is performed for a certain period of time When a touch switch on the NT20S is pressed or a screen is switched or redis played by the PC when the backlight is off by the backlight off function the back light will turn on Any changes of numeric values or characters displayed on the screen will not effect the backlight to turn on again Setting the Backlight OFF Function 94 Use the memory switches to set whether or not the backlight off function is used and the length of time to turn off the backlight The factory setting has been made so as to turn off the b
135. Unit The connector specification is described below Electrical characteristics Conforms to EIA RS 232C specifications Signal direction Signal input and output are relative to the host computer 63 Host Connections by RS 232C Section 2 8 Connector PORS Signal direction Signal name Abbreviation STD pa Receive data ADD D reuso send ASS pe signalgrouna sono Unlisted pins are not used Note For cable parts and the wiring method refer to APPENDIX G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host page 256 Connecting to the Host Computer Use a cable that is compatible with the RS 232C connector of the host to connect the NT20S and the host see the example in the figure below In the example shown here the cable connects the 9 pin connector of the NT20S and 25 pin connector of the host If the host has a 9 pin RS 232C connector use an RS 232C cable with 9 pin connectors at both ends NT20S al le a ae a MHE E ae ja COC IMME Go 00 UU gt Y 9 pin connector 1 Host Interface connector 25 pin connector RS 232C 9 pin type RS 232C cable A Caution e When making the connection switch off the power to the NT20S and PC before disconnecting or connecting any connector e After connecting the communication cable always
136. a refer to the manual for the PC you are using Switch setting C200HX HG HE CQM1 DIP switch settings O e RS232C port communication condition settings Set DIP switch 5 to OFF right side to enable the PC system settings 2 9G 2 tN 5 fel al el fl o 7 a Switch setting CPM1 GENN Set the mode setting CIFo1 gt CPM1 switch to the HOST a O O 0 00000000 upper position PC system setting area settings Write values to the PC system setting area data memory in accordance with the CPU unit port used for connection to the NT20S e When using the RS232 port of C200HX HG HE CQM1 Host link mode DM6645 990 1 Set the conditions with the contents of DM 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity baud rate 9600 bps DM6646 E F 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity baud rate 19200 bps DM6648 0000 43 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 4 e When using port A of C200HX HG HE Channel Settings Host link mode DM6555 0001 Set the conditions with the contents of DM 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity baud rate 9600 bps DM6556 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity baud rate 19200 bps DM6558 0000 Unit No O e When using port B of C200HX HG HE Host link mode DM65530 0901 Set the conditions with the contents of DM 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity baud rate 9
137. ables can be allocated to the words in the PC the PC can write data to the character string memory tables or the initial values can be set when creating the screen data Automatic updating is performed to ensure that the currently displayed NT20S character string memory table contents and PC word contents always match each other There are two methods for referencing character string memory tables used for character string display as follows Direct specification Indirect specification with Ver 5 direct connection only e Direct specification Direct specification is a method of specification in which the contents of dis played memory tables are directly correlated with the contents of the allocated words 2 Allocated channel Direct Character string character string memory table 51 specification memory table 51 DM0100 abed Kjol abca 616 2 61316 4 Indirect specification with Ver 5 direct connection only In indirect specification even if the displayed data is a character string the dis play is correlated with a numeral memory table The contents numerical value of this numeral memory table are regarded as a character string memory table number and the contents of the table with this number are displayed Up to 50 numeral displays and 50 character string displays can be specified on one screen by using indirect specification Indirect Numeral Allocated
138. acklight if no operation has been performed for 10 minutes Set the backlight off function by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Various System Settings Section 3 8 Repeatedly pressing the BK MEMORY SW MENU 1 2 light Off touch switch cycles Comm Type Host Link through the setting options 10 min 1 hour and None in that Key Sound OFF Sider Buzzer Sound OFF y The figure to the left shows the Bk light Off None NT20S ST121 V2 screen Tool Mode NT20M To set and quit the menu press the WRT amp EXIT touch switch To quit without set ting press Quit e None The backlight off function is not used As long as no operation is per formed the same screen remains to be displayed e 10 minutes The backlight will be turned off when no operation has been per formed for 10 minutes e 1 hour The backlight will be turned off when no operation has been performed for 1 hour ZA Caution Do not press touch switches carelessly while the backlight is off or while nothing is displayed on the screen Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably Only
139. acter string displays can be specified on one screen by using indirect specification 165 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 This specification method is a little complex but it allows the display to be changed more easily according to the circumstances In the example above if one were added to the contents of memory table 18 to give 63 the contents of memory table 63 would be displayed instead The memory tables used for display can also be allocated to areas in the PC so that the display can also be changed in response to changes in the data to be dis played i e the contents of character string memory table 62 in the example above However in comparison with direct specification indirect specification requires more time for processing Setting the Words of the Numeral Memory Table 166 When creating the screen data by using the support tool make the following set tings for each numbered numeral e Initialization setting Set whether or not the PC words are initialized with the numeral memory table initial value registered to the screen data memory when the main power supply is turned ON or reset e Number of registration words Set the number of words within 2 words required for registering the numeral data One word can store up to 4 digits Two words can store up to 8 digits e Setting the words for the numeral memory tables The numeral memory tables can be allocated to the following PC words Sett
140. al memory table number used in indirect specification 2 Numeral memory table number used in indirect specification 1 Each time contact 00100 comes ON the display on the NT20S screen changes in accordance with one of the steps in the following sequence NT610G NT610C gt NT20S NT600S 2 Each time contact 00101 comes ON the display on the NT20S screen makes changes in accordance with one of the steps in the following se quence NT600S NT20S gt NT610C NT600S In this example the contents of numeral memory table number 51 referenced in indirect specification are not checked Make sure that the contents of numeral memory table number 51 stay within the range of 0100 to 0103 when the program is actually used 173 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 5 2 4 174 Copying the Memory Table The following describes the procedure to change displayed numerals or character strings by copying the contents of the memory table Numerals and character strings can be changed also by changing the contents of the allocated words Refer to Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings page 169 explained before To change the numerals or character strings displayed on the NT20S copy the data between the numeral or character string memory tables by using the copy memory table setting of the PT status control area PT status control area
141. aller than that of the positive number by 1 digit The actual display will vary according to the zero suppress setting and decimal fraction setting as well as the contents mentioned above Refer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 L e Contents of the character string memory table Acharacter string is stored in the allocated words beginning with the first word in normal size characters Two normal size characters are stored in one word One memory table can store up to 16 words 32 characters Start Start 1 Start 15 Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code31 1 Code32 1 f 1 1 f 1 1 1 Character string memory table display example To display the characters in order allocate the characters as follows A 41H B 42H Start 4 1 42 C 43H D 44H Start 1 4 3 4 4 E 45H F 46H Start 2 4 6 gt ABCDEFGH G 47H G 48H Start 3 4 7 4 8 A a Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 5 2 2 Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words Direct Specifica tion Reference Procedure The following explains the actual procedure for changing the contents of allocated words referenced by direct specification in order to change numerical values and character strings displayed by the NT20S For the situation when using indirect specifi
142. amps to the same bit Example of batch lighting Set the lamps L1 to L5 to the same bit number Li Li L2 L3 L2 L4 L3 L4 L5 L5 134 Lamps Section 4 6 When a lamp is overlapped with a memory table display The guide display message for a lamp is a fixed character string If you want to change the lamp guide display in accordance with some condition overlap the dis play area of a numeral memory table or character string memory table with the lamp However note that different results will be achieved depending on the tim ing of the lighting of the lamp and the updating of the memory table Bear this in mind when creating the control program 135 Touch Switches Section 4 7 4 7 Touch Switches A Caution Reference 136 The NT20S has a function whereby input operations can be performed by using touch panels displayed on the screen NT20S screens can be switched or bit in formation sent to the Host by pressing lightly touching the touch switches in a panel The touch switches can also be made to light up or flash and go off like lamps Touch switches are set when creating the screen data with the support tool This section describes the touch switches that can be displayed and explains the screen switching function and the system key function For details on how the status of the currently displayed touch switch is notified to the Host refer to Lit Flas
143. an air conditioner Do not install the unit directly above equipment that generates a lot of heat heaters transformers large capacity resistors etc Take the following points into account in order to prevent noise 1 Avoid installing the unit in panels in which high voltage equipment is also installed 2 Install the unit at a distance of at least 200 mm from power lines 3 Ifthe unit is installed next to equipment that generates a strong electric or magnetic field solenoids etc provide a gap of at least 40 mm Secure sufficient space for ventilation Do not install in sites subject to severe vibration or strong shocks Install at a distance from high voltage devices and power equipment in consid eration of operability and safety during maintenance Press touch switches with a force of no greater than 30 N If touch switches are pressed in rapid succession their inputs may not be suc cessfully received Confirm that the input of a touch switch has been successfully received before moving on to the next operation Do not press touch switches carelessly while the backlight is off or while noth ing is displayed on the screen Otherwise the system may operate unpredict ably Only press touch switches after confirming system safety Confirm system safety carefully before changing monitor data To ensure system safety be sure to periodically read the PT operating status bit from the host in order to ensure that
144. any memory table e The NT20S can directly refer to PC bit and word data so that it can be connected to a PC without changing the PC program which controls currently running pro duction line e The area to control and notify the NT20S status including display screens back lighting or a flash control and alarms and buzzers can be freely allocated to any part of the PC memory e Can be used irrespective of the operating mode of the PC The direct connection function allows the NT20S to directly read and write almost all bits and words in the PC and to automatically change the NT20S screen display This function can reduce the load on the PC so that the program development effi ciency of the PC improves 1 4 1 NT Link The NT link uses the direct connection function and can execute high speed com munications with the CPU with built in host link of the CPM1 CQM1 C200HS C200HX HG HE or CVM1 CV series When using the NT20S in an NT link two communications modes are possible a single NT20S can be connected to one PC 1 1 NT link or alternatively up to eight NT20S units can be connected to a single PC port 1 N NT link However the 1 N connection NT link can be used with C200HX HG HE only In the following sections the NT link communication mode in general will be indicated by the term NT link a 1 1 connection NT link will be indicated by NT link 1 1 and a 1 N connection NT link will be indicated by NT link 1
145. at the points where the vertical and horizontal lines extending from these two points intersect i e points C and D A e When switches A B and C are switched on at the same time switch D is also assumed to have a C been switched on due to the configuration of the touch switches E Ww When switches A B and D are switched on atthe same time switch C is also assumed to have D been switched on due to the configuration of the touch switches Smallest touch switch frame Touch Switches Section 4 7 4 7 1 Functions of Touch Switches Touch switches are created using rectangular elements measuring 19 dots hori zontally by 19 dots vertically A touch switch can comprise more than one touch switch element Up to 72 touch switches 12 horizontally x 6 vertically can be reg istered on one screen 19 dots RE 19 dots A touch switch can comprise more than one touch switch element PC Host When the touch switch is When the touch switch is pressed pressed bit information the touch switch number or bit is sent to the PC information is sent to the Host Host link NT link RS 232C e Functions of touch switches Touch switches can have the following functions PC notification function NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 Host link NT link C200H direct communication page 183 NT20S ST128 RS 232C page 212 Screen switch standalone function page
146. ations port 1 RS 232C Communications port 2 RS 232C RS 422A 1 0 port selector switch RS 232C RS 422A Two types of connectors are provided to CV500 LK201 host link unit Both of these connector types can connect to the NT20S with an RS 232C connector cable Se lect the connector cable which matches the connector type To connect to communication port 1 This is a 25 pin RS 232C connector Use a connector cable with a 25 pin con nector on one end and a 9 pin connector on the other end NT20S side e To connect to communication port 2 This is a 9 pin RS 232C RS 422A connector Use a connector cable with a 9 pin connector on both ends S y Set the I O port selector switch to the RS 232C side upper side to use this port Connecting the NT20S to a C Series CQM1 Unit CQM1 can connect to the NT20S by the RS 232C method Use an RS 232C 9 pin type connector cable e To connect to the RS 232C port This is a 9 pin RS 232C connector Use a connector cable with a 9 pin connec tor on both ends Connecting to C Series C200HX HG HE When using C series C200HX HG HE models the NT20S can be connected to the standard port of the CPU unit or to ports A and B of the expansion communication board Procure an RS 232C 9 pin type connection cable for the connection For details on the specifications installation method etc of the communication board used for the connection refer to
147. ations of the power supply that can be connected are as follows Power supply voltage 24 VDC Allowable power supply voltage 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC fluctuation range 24 VDC 15 10 Power supply capaciy 29 Installation Section 2 2 e Parts used for connection A Caution For the connection to the power supply terminal block twisted wires of 2 mm or greater cross sectional area and M3 5 size crimp terminals must be used Tighten the screws on the terminal block to a torque of 0 8N m Otherwise fire may occur Fork type Round type 7 mm or less 7 mm or less Os Recommended terminals Maker Type Type Applicable Wire fork type round type stranded wire Japan Solderless Terminal MFG 2 YS3A Fuji Terminal 2 YAS3 5 V2 S3 5 2 00 to 2 63 mm Nichifu Terminal 2Y 3 5 30 Connecting to the Support Tool Section 2 3 2 3 Connecting to the Support Tool Connect the NT20S to a computer with an RS 232C cable to transfer the screen data created by using a support tool to the NT20S An NT20S ST121 EV3 ST128 cannot be connected to both a personal computer running the support tool and a Host at the same time Connect the personal com puter only when transmitting screen data NT20S ST121 EV3 ST128 NT20S ST122 V1
148. ay of the characters and marks The characters and marks can be enlarged to the following scales rn er Pr PT PT PT Double Double x1 scale width scale height scale x4 scale x9 scale x16 scale Reference Smoothing The characters and marks enlarged to the x4 scale or larger are displayed with the outline automatically smoothed This function is called smoothing 119 Outline of Functions Section 4 2 e Reverse and flashing display Reverse display The display brightness ofthe character and the background is reversed comparing with the normal display Flashing display Characters are displayed as they flash The normal display alternates with no display Reverse and flashing display The reverse display alternates with the normal display Types and Attributes of the Figures The following types of figures can be input by using the support tool and be dis played during operation Continuous straight lines including up to 256 vertexes can be drawn up to 255 straight lines can be connected Continuous straight lines Circle O 4 23 Communications with the Host Communication using the host link NT link C200H direct communication The NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 can communicate with the PC through the host link NT link C200H direct communication Bits and words are allocated to areas of the PC memory selectable without restriction and the NT20S can write data to them or read from them directly This makes the follo
149. bal http www omron com USA http www omron com oei Canada http www omron ca UNITED STATES To locate a Regional Sales Office local Distributor or to obtain product information call 847 843 7900 CANADA REGIONAL SALES OFFICES Ontario Toronto 416 286 6465 Kitchener 519 896 1144 Kingston 613 376 3968 Quebec Montreal 514 636 6676 British Columbia Vancouver 604 522 8855 Alberta Edmonton 403 440 0818 Calgary 403 257 3095 Sao Paulo 55 11 5564 6488 Cono Sur 54 114 787 1129 Florida 954 227 2121 Ciudad Juarez 656 623 7083 Mexico D F 555 534 1195 Monterrey N L 818 377 4281 V020 E3 2 2 99 1999 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in the U S A
150. both Bit 13 and Bit 12 are turned ON simultaneously Bit 13 takes priority and the continuous buzzer is selected Another way to stop a buzzer sounding is to use a touch switch to which the buzzer stop attribute function is allocated Whether or not the buzzer actually sounds also depends on the setting of the buzzer memory switch of the NT20S For details on this setting see Using the Buzzer page 92 Besides using PT status control bit operations the buzzer status can also be con trolled by the screen attributes The screen attributes are set by using the support tool The functions that can be set using the screen attributes are the following Buzzer attribute Set whether or not the buzzer will sound when the screen is displayed and if it sounds the type of buzz er e Backlight mode bit 8 If bit 8 is turned ON when the screen is displayed bit 15 ON the screen is made to flash using the backlight When bit 8 is turned OFF normal display is resumed When the screen is not displayed bit 15 OFF the backlight mode is invalid It is possible to use NT20S switch settings to make the backlight go off automati cally after a set time during which there have been no operations Besides using PT status control bit operations the backlight status can also be controlled by the screen attributes The screen attributes are set by using the sup port tool The functions that can be set using the screen attributes ar
151. both bits 09002 and 09003 turn ON Continuous buzzer bit 13 0 OFF Intermittent buzzer bit 12 0 OFF The NT20S buzzer stops 195 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC Section 5 5 5 5 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC Determining the NT20S Operating Status The status operating statuses etc of the NT20S can be determined from the PC by reading the PT status word in the PT status notify area allocated in the PC memory PT status notify area gt Currently displayed screen Content upgrade memory table PT stopped ef gt PT status 5 5 1 Ascertainable NT20S Statuses Notified Operating Statuses PT status notification bits of the PT status notify area 1514131211109 8 765 4 3 2 1 0 Bit T Word PT status notification bits 0 0 PT status m 2 l ES A Se 3 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 0 0 0 0 0 Bit PT operating status 1 ON operating 0 OFF stopped Screen switch strobe flag Numeral setting strobe flag ZA Caution Make the settings so that the PT control area and PT status notify area do not over lap e PT operating status bit 15 When the NT20S is inthe RUN mode this bit is set to ON 1 In other modes and while the system menu is displayed it is OFF 0 When this bit is OFF allocated bits and words cannot be read or written to During the run mode
152. cation see Changing Displayed Nu merals Values or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words Indirect Specification page 171 Numerals and character strings can be changed also by making a copy of the memory tables Refer to Copying the memory table explained later To change the numerals or character strings displayed on the NT20S make changes with the numeral or character string memory table To make changes with the numeral or character string memory table of the NT20S change the con tents of words by the PC Allocated word numeral table Numeral table 1 Stat 57 677 8 12345678 Start 1 12345678 a Allocated word character string memory table Character string Start 6162 63 64 65 66 Start 1 abcdef memory table 4 sae This method is convenient when changing data has to be displayed for example when monitoring the contents of PC words 1 Use the support tool to allocate the numeral and character string memory tables to the PC memory 2 Register the memory tables for the numerals and character strings to be dis played when creating the screen data by using the support tool Specify di rect as the reference method To display a character string use character display and specify the charac ter string memory table by using the support tool To display numerals use numeral display and specify the numeral memory table by using the support tool
153. cicate Set cursor position E2B X LOCATE 43 0 PRINT SPACES 36 LOCATE 43 0 INPUT X COORDINATE 000 255 BX IF BX gt 639 OR BX lt 0 THEN E2B X E2B Y LOCATE 43 1 PRINT SPACES 36 LOCATE 43 1 INPUT Y COORDINATE 000 127 BY IF BY gt 255 OR BY lt 0 THEN E2B Y BX STRS BX BX RIGHTS BXS LEN BXS 1 BX RIGHTS 00 BX 3 BYS STRS BY BYS RIGHTS BY LEN BY 1 BYS RIGHTS 00 BY 3 SEND SENDS BXS BYS RETURN ESCA Mii o aia Specify Displayed Characters LOCATE 43 0 PRINT Write character string MAX 32 CHARACTERS gt LOCATE 43 1 INPUT C CS LEFTS C 32 LS RIGHTS 0 HEXS LEN C 2 SEND SEND L C RETURN RESCI aaa Draw Polyline LN 0 SL E7 X LOCATE 41 8 PRINT SPACES 38 LOCATE 41 9 PRINT SPACES 38 LOCATE 41 8 INPUT X COORDINATE END AT 999 LX IF LX 999 THEN E7 E IF LX lt 0 OR LX gt 255 THEN GOTO E7 X E7 Y LOCATE 41 9 PRINT SPACES 38 LOCATE 41 9 INPUT Y COORDINATE LY IF LY lt 0 OR LY gt 127 THEN GOTO E7 Y LX STR LX LXS RIGHTS LXS LEN LXS 1 LX RIGHTS 00 LX 3 EXAMPLE PROGRAM Section 6 7 4660 4670 4680 4690 4700 4710 4720 4730 4740 4750 4760 4770 4780 4790 4800 4810 4820 4830 4840 4850 4860 4870 4880 4890 4900 4910 4920 4930 4940 4950 4960 5970 5980 5990 5000 5010 5020 5030 5040 5050 5060 5070 5080 5090 5100 5110 LY STR LY LYS RIGHTS LYS LEN LYS 1 LY RIGHTS 00 LYS 3 LOCATE 39
154. converter unit NT AL001 and describes the meth ods for installing and removing it Refer to this information when designing the control panel Dimensions acc GIIA IR roe 74 5 2 93 Zay i 30 0 16 100 2 3 94 1 18 105 4 13 or less p 45 1 77 EE AA With RS 422A terminal block cover closed 30 1 18 W x 114 4 49 H x 100 2 3 94 D mm in With RS 422A terminal block cover open 30 1 18 W x 114 4 49 H x 119 5 4 7 D mm in Unit mm in Installation and Removal The RS 232C RS 422A converter unit NT ALO01 is installed on a DIN rail or in an operation panel The RS 422A terminal block of the converter unit can easily be removed 249 Handling the RS 232C RS 422 Converter Unit Appendix C Installation on a DIN Rail Hook the top part of the rear of the converter unit a in the figure onto the top edge of the DIN rail and push the unit in direction b Then fit end plates on the right and left sides of the converter unit so that the unit cannot shift sideways Removal from the DIN Rail Remove the end plates at right and left then insert a flat tipped screwdriver into the rail stopper on the bottom of the unit and pry the unit away Installation in an Operation Panel Make two screw holes in an operation panel wal
155. created is sent as a 8 digit hexadecimal number Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 6 4 Cautions when bit input is permitted If the touch switches are set in the following positions using the support tool while the setting is bit input permitted the following operations will occur due to the configuration of the touch switches Take this into consideration when setting touch switch areas Example 1 Touch switches are set at positions A B C and D using the minimum switch set ting unit e If switches A B and C are turned ON at the A C same time switch D is also set ON e Similarly if switches A B and D are turned ON E at the same time switch C is also set ON D Example 2 Touch switch areas E F and G are set E F e If switches E and F are turned ON at the same time switch G is also set ON G Touch switch notification control and attributes Inverse and normal display states can be set as attributes of touch switches by using the support tool There are slight differences in the operation when a touch switch is pressed depending on whether bit input is permitted or not permitted Bit input not permitted Touch switch notification by number The touch switch is lit for 0 2 seconds when pressed and then returns to the unlit status Bit input permitted Touch switch notification by bit information The touch switch is lit while pressed and
156. crews on the terminal block to a torque of 0 8N m Otherwise fire may occur e After connecting the communication cable always secure it with the screws Otherwise the cable may disconnect causing operation to fail e The cable s tensile load is 30 N Do not subject it to loads greater than this Otherwise a discontinuity may occur causing operation to fail Do not install the NT20S at sites subject to the following conditions Otherwise the product may malfunction e Severe temperature variations e Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications e High humidity condensation e Splashing chemical agents e Severe oil splashing e Corrosive or flammable gases e Strong vibrations or shocks XV xvi e Direct exposure to wind and rain outdoor sites e Strong ultra violet irradiation Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the NT20S is used at a location subject to any of the following conditions e Static electricity or noise from other equipment e Strong electric or magnetic fields e Nearby power cables e Potential exposure to radioactivity e Donotinstall at a site exposed to chemicals steam etc or subject to excessive airborne dust Do not install the unit at locations where the ambient temperature goes outside the range 0 to 50 C or where the relative humidity goes outside the range 35 to 85 RH If the ambient temperature exceeds the range indicated above install a fan or
157. d Inverse Display Format ESC 1B 23 Description Clears the inverse display attribute so that all characters and marks sent subse quently are not highlighted Other attributes remain unchanged Reference The inverse display attribute is set with the Set Inverse Display Command The setting with this command remains valid until the screen display is switched or another display attribute setting is made The default display attributes are set toa normal display when a screen is initially displayed 218 Terminal Commands Section 6 6 Set Flashing Display Format Description Reference End Flashing Display Format Description Reference ESC 1B 24 Sets the display attribute to flashing so that all characters and marks sent subse quently are displayed flashing Other attributes remain unchanged The Set Flashing Display Command is cancelled by the End Flashing Display Command or the Normal Display Command refer to 6 6 Normal Display and 6 6 End Flashing Display The setting with this command remains valid until the screen display is switched or another display attribute setting is made The default display attributes are settoa normal display when a screen is initially displayed Use this command with the Set Inverse Display Command refer to 6 6 Set In verse Display to produce a flashing inverse display ESC 1B 25 Clears the flashing displa
158. dard port of the CPU unit and the port of the expansion communication board is used for the connection Cranea Wing Value oe pedia DM6645 Use NT link 1 N a po highest unit No C200HX HG HE in the maximum Mena 5100 number of connect able PTs 1 to 7 C200HX HG HE When using C200HE the PT unit No range is 1 to 3 57 Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication Section 2 7 2 7 2 7 1 58 Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Commu nication Connect an NT20S ST122 V1 and PC made by OMRON with an I O cable Applicable PC Units Before making the connection check the series and model of the PC to which the connection is to be made A list of the PCs that can be connected to an NT20S using C200H direct communication is presented below CPU Unit C20H C28HC40H C60H C200H CPU01 E C200H CPU03 E C200H CPU11 E C200H CPU21 E C200H CPU23 E C200H CPU31 E C200HS CPU01 E C200HS CPU03 E C200HS CPU21 E C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU11 E C200HE CPU32 E C200HE CPU42 E C200HG CPU33 E C200HG CPU43 E C200HG CPU53 E C200HG CPU63 E C200HX CPU34 E C200HX CPU44 E C200HX CPU54 E C200HX CPU64 E Model Name C200HS C200HE C200HG C200HX With systems in which the user program operates in accordance with the PC cycle time since there is some fluctuation in the PC cycle time the system operation may
159. dth 8 dots 0 100 Sign display Yes A value below 100 will be displayed in the minus direction as shown above 3 When the absolute value of the value is above 1000 The bar graph will be displayed the same as 2 above The value is displayed as follows according to the sign display setting Sign display No Sign display Yes 132 Lamps Section 4 6 4 6 Lamps The NT20S has the lamp function used to simply display the PC bit status This section describes the lamps which can be displayed The lamp display status lit flashing or unlit can be changed by instructions from the PC host For details on how to change the status of a currently displayed lamp refer to Turning ON lit and OFF unlit the Lamps Changing the Contents of Allocated Bits on page 179 Lamp and Touch Switch Display Bit Specification on page 210 and Lamp and Touch Switch Display Number Specification on page 210 4 6 1 Lamp Functions Lamp Attributes The lamps are the graphic areas whose method of display can be changed by us ing the PC Available display methods are lit unlit and flash Up to 128 lamps can be registered in one screen The display status lit unlit and flashing which are registered when creating the screen data can be switched according to the ON OFF of the PC bit status Unlit Lit The following attributes can be set with the lamp
160. e ON Messages are displayed in English OFF Sw2 3 Switching to the System Menu enabled disabled ON The System Menu cannot be displayed If an error occurs during a start up the System Menu will be automatically displayed However transfer mode cannot be entered OFF The System Menu can be displayed SW2 4 Reserved for system use OFF Must always be OFF indicates factory setting Z CAUTION Ifthe DIP switch settings have been changed when the NT20S is powered reset the power to the NT20S The changes with the DIP switches become effective only after the power supply is reset Reference In addition to the DIP switches set also the communication type host link baud rate etc at the memory switches when host link NT link is used When using the RS 232C interface set the RS 232C communication condi tions and other appropriate settings For these settings refer to Section 3 5 Setting the Conditions of Communica tions with the Host by Using the Memory Switches page 75 e It may be necessary to change the DIP switch settings after installing the NT20S in an operation panel Bear this in mind when deciding the installation position During work at the panel take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the unit 24 Description of Parts and Settings Section 2 1 2 1 3 Setting the Communication Condition Setting Switches NT20S ST122 V1 Only When using the NT20S ST122 V1 the com
161. e See Appendix L PC Memory Map page 278 of the APPENDICES for more details Procedure 1 Usethe support tool to allocate the PT status notify area PT gt PC to the PC memory 2 Using the support tool create a numeral setting screen and allocate the nu meral memory table to the PC memory 3 Create a PC program for reading the content upgrade memory table in the PT status notify area when the numeral setting strobe flag in the PT status notify area comes ON 1 4 Read the allocated word for the numeral memory table number read in step 3 189 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 5 3 Example of reading a numeral memory table into which a numerical value has been input 190 This example shows the reading of the numeral memory table number after a val ue has been changed by inputting numerical data at the NT20S e Setting at the support tool Make the following settings using the support tool Allocated word for the PT status notify area CHO110 Numeral memory table entry No 3 DM 0005 saved word One Numeral memory table entry No 4 DM 0006 saved word One Data registered for the screens Numeral setting 1 Reference table numeral memory table 3 Numeral setting 2 Reference table numeral memory table 4 Numeral memory table entry number 3 4 digit input Line 1 Qty Defect limit Numeral memory table entry numb
162. e flashing inverse flashing Continuous straight lines circles Data Quantities NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 NT20S ST128 128 strings comprising 32 characters each Numeral data 128 max 8 digits each Touch switches Max 256 strings per file Max 256 strings per file 245 Specifications Appendix A Special Features Buzzer Two types Continuous sound and intermittent sound Setting Set key press sound in the Memory Switch menu of the Maintenance Mode ON If ERR ON is set the buzzer only sounds when an error occurs ON The buzzer sounds on designation from the PC when a screen with a buzzer ON specification is called or on display of an error screen such as for a receive error OFF The buzzer is turned off on designation from the PC by touch switch input or when a screen without a buzzer ON specification is displayed Sound pressure Min 80 dB average 87 dB measured 10 cm from front face Maintenance functions e Self test for memory switches etc e Status setting confirmation for communications and other conditions e Simple communications confirmation Key input sound setting 0 2 second input sound when a touch switch is pressed Setting Set key press sound of the Memory Switch menu in the Maintenance mode ON Communications Specifications For a Host Link NT20S ST121 EV3 EARS 2320 Communications settings Start stop synchronization Baud rate 9600 19 200 bps Data leng
163. e NT20S to be used as a terminal of the Host to display text and graphics independently of the screens stored in the NT20S The Host sends a command and the NT20S processes the message The NT20S does not send back a response to the Host Host program NT20S operation Terminal command 202 RS 232C Interface Unit Communications Section 6 1 6 1 2 Precautions Command Length Some important points to consider when using commands are listed below If a mistake during command specification results in a command being too long the correct length of the command is executed and the remainder is ignored A timeout error results if a mistake during command specification results in a com mand being too short Interval Between Transmitted Commands As asmall number of bytes is transmitted by the Host the interval between trans missions should not exceed 5 seconds if a command is divided up for transmis sion A timeout error occurs if the interval between transmissions exceeds 5 se conds When commands are sent too frequently a buffer overflow error may occur if the NT20S cannot keep up with the command processing In order to prevent buffer overflow use flow control Controlling PT Status with Operating Commands Control of the NT20S status by the operating commands is restricted by the NT20S memory switch settings as listed below Operating command Restriction from memory switch setting Buzzer control command ESC
164. e Overlapping screen e Continuous screen The screen type is set with each screen in the Screen List screen of the support tool Select a screen type according to the purpose and create characters and figures on the screen In the case of the NT20S ST128 RS 232C character strings and graphics can be also displayed in accordance with commands from the host independently of the currently displayed screen The details of each screen type are given below A normal screen is the basic screen of the NT20S It is not necessary to select a screen type overlapping or consecutive when to create the screen data on a nor mal screen When a normal screen is selected existing screens will be erased and a normal screen will be displayed Several normal screens can be overlapped and displayed as one screen A group of overlapped screens is called an overlapping screen Several normal screens are displayed in the order of screen numbers which have been designated to each screen and form an overlapping screen Up to eight screens can be overlapped to form one overlapping screen The base screen used for making an overlapping screen is called a parent screen and a bunch of screens which are laid over the parent screen are called child screens All display elements can be used on a parent screen The screen attributes such as a buzzer attribute set in the parent screen become effective in an overlapping screen Screen Displa
165. e eee 24 FIEIS 3 23 rs wate e eens 114 FIS OMS 3 4 ove e aie ya eae eA 86 Flash memory eee eee eee eee 75 FIASHING iad ccs es eae eee sa ens 133 138 Flashing display ooo ooo o o 120 127 Flow Control circo cache goatee beta 83 EraMe io de r 133 4 digit number input notify 212 4 digit write numeral memory table 206 Function restrictions depending on the SUPPO tOOl occ eee eiere ee es 255 G Graph frame 0 eee 130 Guide display oooooooooo 134 138 H Host I F tool connector 04 23 Host communication conditions 63 FIOSTHINK aaan a n a dd 12 78 Host link method cece eee eee 32 Host link unit o o ooooooo 35 37 271 VO Check iii it 99 I O connection cable ooooooooccccocoo eee 59 A OI 4 28 Indirect specification 163 165 171 INitsSCreen ire iria iaa 73 74 Initialization by using the DIP switch 89 Initialization by using the DIP switch Forced initialization o o o o o 74 Initialization by using the system menu 72 Initialization error aaau ee 237 Initialization setting 164 166 Initialize the screen data memory 87 Mitan orcas 72 Initializing Memory 6 ee 72 Installation environment 005 251 Integer fraction parts 000e eee 146 Intermittent buzzer
166. e manual for the NT20S itself The NT20S is a unit which integrates a programmable terminal body and host interface unit This operation manual describes the functions and handling of both the programmable terminal body and the host interface function Creating and transferring screen data e NT Series Support Tool Ver 2L Operation Manual VO28 E1 _ The screens displayed on the NT20S are created with the support tool and trans ferred to the NT20S This manual describes how to create and transfer screen data For Connection to Other Makers PCs e PC Connection V042 E1 NT600S ST121 B EV3 and NT600S ST211 B EV3 can be connected to Mit subishi A series PCs This manual describes how to make the connection and how to make settings when connecting the PT to a Mitsubishi A series PC In order to use the PT while connected to a PC made by a manufacturer other than OMRON the Ver 2 3 support tool must be used xii PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Terminal The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Terminal You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or oper ate a Programmable Terminal L Intended Audience A A A A A A a e xiv Z General Precaution S 2ra eaan t xiv 3 Safety Precautions cen ens E a A ada eee be a da a
167. e self maintenance functions such as I O check and setting sta tus check 3 9 1 I O Check The I O operations for the following items of the NT20S are checked by the I O check function e Touch Switch e Communications with the support tool e Communications with the Host NT20S ST128 RS 232C only e LCD e LED Check e The Screen Data Memory e Buzzer Checking the Touch Switches Execute a touch switch check by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select I O Check MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Select Touch Switch 1 0 CHECK MENU Quit LCD Display LED Check Comm Check Buzzer Touch Switch 99 Data Memory System Maintenance Section 3 9 A panel of 6 row x 12 column touch switches each switch sized 1 x 1 cm will be displayed EXIT switch to exit the DDODDOOODODO a touch switch check menu OVOLO The touch switch is normal if it is highlighted while it is pressed ODOQDDODQOQODDODU e Press a touch switch on the screen If the touch switch is highlighted while it is pressed the touch switch is normally functioning e When the check is finished press the EXIT touch switch The I O chec
168. e special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 278 To set the data memory DM specify the word number and then the bit number 00 to 15 178 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 5 3 5 3 2 Turning ON lit and OFF unlit the Lamps Changing the Contents of Allocated Bits The following describes the procedure to change the lamp display status on the NT20S by changing the contents of the allocated bits To change the lamp display status on the NT20S turn ON and OFF the lamp con trol bit allocated in the PC Lamp 1 _ Lamp 2 Allocated bit Lamp 1 Y Y a 1 lt 1 ON a vit Allocated bit Lamp 2 2 0 OFF The lamp bit indicates the lamp status as follows O OFF Unlit 1 ON Lit reverse display or flashing Procedure 1 Use the support tool to set the PC memory area where the lamp bit is to be allocated to 2 Register the lamps to the screen when creating the screen data by using the support tool 3 Create a PC program to turn ON OFF the lamp bit Use the support tool to set the lamp display attributes whether the lamp is lit or flashing when the lamp control bit is turned ON 179 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 5
169. e the follow ing Backlight Set whether the backlight will be continuously or inter mittently lit when the screen is displayed 193 NT20S Status Control Section 5 4 5 4 2 How to Control NT20S Functions This section describes how to control the functions of the NT20S e Restrictions on allocating words The PT status control area PC PT can be allocated to the PC memory areas listed in the following table u femen O oaen O 7 en memaca neay O mentiras O arme fe A CO fome AAC fom ANC m poms O gt AR poa ey O Aaa ey m tink ete o fo O OK x NG Since all the CVM1 CV series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the system they cannot be used for applications not related to the system The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type See Appendix L PC Memory Map page 278 of the APPENDIX L for more details Procedure 1 Usethe support tool to set the area at the PC used for allocation of the PT sta tus control area PC PT 2 WriteaPC program for writing the control data into the PT status control bit of the PT status control area e Timing for control of the PT status control bit The PT status control bit is not read when the NT20S is started up It is read and control executed only when the contents of the PT status control bit are read for the first time after the NT20S is started up Since NT20S status control is executed when the bit correspo
170. ece eee eee ee eee 178 5 4 NT20S Status Control 0 cee eee ence ene 191 5 5 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC Determining the NT20S Operating Status 00 0 ee eee eee eee 196 SECTION 6 Using the RS 232 visadscnca sana vectcaiacine sats oy 199 Table DE Commands cscs die ei ek Geach eNO el aha kA hoe aad co se EA 200 6 1 RS 232C Communications sars eaea e eea eE cee eee e nen eens 201 6 2 Sereen Displays susie geste A A eal arent ele 204 623 Memory Tables ips usta dares Gog tied ates A tans aaah Mads A ne 205 6 4 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting 00 cee eee eee eee 208 6 5 Controlling the NT20S Status 0 ce een eens 214 6 6 Terminal Commands 0 d aai E E eet e e a E SN 216 6 77 Key to Progtams crossi cae eee a e eevee bee e 222 EXAMPLE PROGRAM Cerapio terka ina a ANE RANA ie olas ds 223 SECTION 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 235 Jel Hardware Pauls ais tinc Ge spud da bat Sd ec ike Thea eds Sch dels a Sled 236 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages 2 0 0 cee cee ee eee eee ene 237 7 3 Maintenance of the NT20S seias aracin e e ia a d aaia E a ae a a ene 239 7 4 Inspection and Cleaning 0 0 Ia IEA ENAA NAT E O E 241 APPENDICES s2 2620sseideias ode sad SPeCifi Cations esis nea DIMENSIONS ri id ad abad Handling the RS 232C RS 422A Converter Unit 0 cece eee eee eee ee NT20S Installation Environment 0 00
171. eck Init Memory _ gt INITIALIZE MEMORY MENU m Quit Init Screen page 72 NT20S ST121 EV3 MEMORY SWITCH MENU Comm Type page 78 Key Press Sound page 91 H Buzzer Sound page 92 m Backlight Off page 94 H Support Tool Mode page 95 L Automatic Reset page 84 L Baud Rate page 79 NT20S ST122 V1 MEMORY SWITCH MENU Key Press Sound page 91 H Buzzer Sound page 92 m Backlight Off page 94 H Comm Type page 78 Automatic Reset page 84 Support Tool Mode page 95 NT20S ST128 MEMORY SWITCH MENU Key Press Sound page 91 Buzzer Sound page 92 m Backlight Off page 94 Automatic Reset page 84 Data Bits page 82 L Stop Bits page 82 Parity Check page 82 Flow Control page 82 Baud Rate page 82 L LMP Bit Control page 97 NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 COMM CHECK MENU m Quit Tool I F page 100 NT20S ST128 COMM CHECK MENU m Quit H Tool I F page 101 RS 232C I F page 102 First screen Second screen First screen Second screen 69 Operation modes and the System Menu Section 3 3 3 3 3 Operations with the System Menu The following gives the procedure to call the System Menu select the menu items and other operations with the System Menu Make sure that DIP SW2 3 Switch t
172. ect LCD Display 1 0 CHECK MENU Quit _ LCD Display LED Check Comm Check Buzzer Touch Switch Data Memory e The LCD displays dots segments of the screen line by line beginning with the top left corner If all the dots are displayed normally the NT20S will enter the I O CHECK MENU after all the dots have been turned off e To cancel the LCD indication check press any touch switch anywhere on the screen The I O Check Menu will be redisplayed 103 System Maintenance Section 3 9 Checking the Buzzer Check the NT20S buzzer by using the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select I O Check MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Select Buzzer 1 0 CHECK MENU Quit _ LCD Display LED Check Comm Check Buzzer Touch Switch Data Memory e f the buzzer function is normal the continuous buzzer sound will be made e To stop the buzzer press EXIT touch switch in the buzzer check screen The NT20S will enter the I O CHECK MENU Reference Though memory switch setting for the buzzer has been made for OFF the buzzer will sound when the buzzer check is executed 104 System Main
173. ed words Decimal display without signs If the most significant digit is F it is handled as 0 and the most significant digit other than F and other digits are handled as stored in the allocated words Decimal display with signs If the most significant digit is F it is handled as minus sign and the most significant digit other than F and other digits are handled as stored in the allocated words 167 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 168 Numeral memory table display examples e When the data are numeral data 0 to 9 Decimal without sign 123456 gt Decimal with sign 123456 Hexadecimal F0123456 Start 3 4 5 6 Start 1 F 0 1 2 e When the data contain characters A to F Start 3 B 5 6 ee pola sign do Stat 1 F 0 1 2 gt Decimal wi sign AA Hexadecimal F0123B56 If the hexadecimal data A to F are stored when the decimal display has been set the alphabets are displayed If the number of display digits has been set to be smaller than the maximum num ber of digits of the registration words 4 digits for 1 word 8 digits for 2 words the contents of the allocated words are not displayed and symbols will be displayed at all digits If the most significant digit is F when decimal with signs has been set the nu meral is handled as a negative number The maximum number of digits of the neg ative number becomes sm
174. ed by OMRON 275 Option List Appendix K APPENDIX K Option List Replaceable Backlight NT20S CFLO1 This is a backlight for replacement purposes is E Note The disposal of used backlights may be regulated by national or local authorities Dispose of them in accor dance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local authority Reflection Suppressing Protective Sheet NT20M KBA04 Stuck to the display to prevent it from being soiled The entire sheet is colorless and transparent lt 276 Option List Appendix K Chemical resistant Cover Type NT20S KBA01 Covers the front panel and protects it from chemical agents The entire sheet is milky white and made of silicone rubber The protection the cover affords is summarized below Protects Against Does Not Protect Against Boric acid Hexane Sulfuric acid Lubricating oils Nitric acid Benzene Ammonia gas Butane Carbon dioxide Carbonic acid Phenol Chlorinated solvents Glycerin Napthalene Ammonia water Soya oil Calcium chloride Toluene Developing fluid hypo Acetaldehyde Lard For information on protection against chemical agents not included in the table above please ask OMRON Ifitis a chemical agent to which silicone rubber is recognized to be resistant the cover can be used with confidence even if that chemical agent is not listed in the Protects Against column above Reference
175. ee 142 TUDO ad de 198 To stop the buzzer sound 92 104 TOO Fi Shaan aie Lene 101 TOOLS NGS orita dc 113 OU eegnen rr aa 71 Touch switch number output from NT20S to host o o o o o o o o oo o 213 Touch switch method ooo o ooo o 208 Touch switch bit output from NT20S to host 000 213 Touch switch disable 214 Touch switch enable 0 sees 214 Touch switches ooooo o 9 16 70 136 286 Touch switches used to call the system Merci a Ad each 70 Transmission in file units 86 TTANSIMIE 2 2 cani ae ds as es 68 Transmit mode o ooocoooooooo 71 88 117 Transmitting screen data 87 117 Transportation and storage 251 Turn ON the power 0 cee eee eee 67 Types of notification operation 181 A A Sere the A 34 U Uniti nUIMBer 6 ee scen ee tate es ral ee alee 25 UN eeraa ne te ted erat a ec aE a eaa 133 Upgrading bar graphs 177 Upper lower limit check 141 Used for the first time ooo o o o oooo 72 SCR es Be oh ite He SARA RR e ds 125 Using numeric keys 000 c eee 145 Using the thumbwheel type 147 Using touch switches for notification to the PO ES 181 W WAMING En r a A E E A pata eee XV Waterproof requirements o oooooooo o 4 Wide angle of visibility
176. efer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manu al V028 E1 Start Up the NT20S Display the System Menu page 68 Turn ON the power to the NT20S When no screen data has been registered the SYSTEM MENU will be dis played If the NT20S enters the RUN mode press appropriate touch switches to display the System Menu Initializeing Memory page 72 Select a System Menu and initialize the NT20S unit memory Memory Switch Settings page 75 Select the System Menu and make settings such as the communication conditions for communication with the Host by setting the memory switches Registerung the Screen Data page 86 Connect a support tool to the NT20S and transfer the screen data from the support tool to the NT20S For the connection of a support tool refer to Section 2 3 Connecting to the Support Tool page 31 Starting the Operation page 90 Connect to the PC Host and start the operation System Maintenance page 99 If an error has occurred during operation check the I Os settings etc referring to this guide 66 Starting the NT20S Section 3 2 3 2 Starting the NT20S When the NT20S is started it will enter the RUN mode if system settings and screen data registration have been completed If no screen data has been regis tered or the screen data are destroyed the System Menu will be displayed Before turning ON the power check the following DIP switch settings on the NT20S
177. elements has been read Bs ee A Reading of the f elements that could not PT PC be registered ps o e aa i i If the number of elements that could not be registered is large T stat 1 Reading the aos PT PC the PT status control area is read after every two element control area i readings a A a ee a that could not be PT PC registered AAA E AAA Reading of elements that could not be PT PC registered Le He eet Ah a a PT PC pak Processing performed if necessary ESR S DLE gaa ee a 252 NT20S Internal Processing Appendix E e Number of words for screen element registration The number of words used for screen element registration is as follows Allocated words Number of words Allocated bits Number of words calculated by summing the number of bits in each area and taking 1 word to be 16 bits Example Character string memory tables 3 of 12 allocated words each Numeral memory tables 4 of 2 allocated words each Allocated bits for control 19 I O relays 7 link relays contiguous bits The number of words assigned to character string memory tables and numeral memory tables is as follows 12 words X 3 2 words X 4 44 words The assignment for bits is as follows 19 I O relays 16 1 word with a remainder of 3 bits 2 words 7 link relays 16 O words with a remainder of 7 bits 1 word The total is therefore 44 words 2 w
178. em setting area refer to the manual for the PC you are using Switch setting C200HX HG HE CQM1 DIP switch settings O zZ Pa e RS 232C port communication i condition settings ae Set DIP switch 5 to OFF right side oa to enable setting of the PC system ON lt OFF settings PC system setting area settings C200HX HG HE CPM1 CQM1 Write values to the PC system setting area data memory in accordance with the CPU unit port used for connection to the NT20S PC Side Channel Writing Value RS 232 port of C200HX HG HE DM6645 CQM1 Port A of C200HX HG HE DM6555 4000 Use NT link 1 1 Port B of C200HX HG HE DM6550 CPM1 DM6650 47 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 1 Section 2 5 e CVM1 CV series EV When connecting to a CVM1 CV series EVL 1 CPU set the switches as given below e I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C O e NT link setting DIP SW3 leo Set SWS to ON O OFF lt gt ON When using CVM1 CV series always set CPU execution processing execution control 2 in the PC system settings to simultaneous processing 48 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 6 2 6 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Connect the NT20S to an OMRON PC by the NT link method To connect the NT20S to a PC by the NT link 1 N m
179. ement timing see note 1 Note 1 No element timing signals on C200H LK201 V1 2 C500 LK201 and C200H LK201 V1 only 257 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host Appendix G e Wiring Connections The NT20S does not use pin 4 RS or pin 5 CS Either short the RS and CS pins of the PC connector together or set the CTS setting selector switch at the rear face of the host link unit to OV see in the figure Connect the cable shielding wire to the connector cover and pin 1 at the host link unit end of the cable only NT20S PC host link unit Abbrevi Pin Pin Abbrevi atioon number number atioon 1 1 FG SD 2 2 SD gt RD 3 3 RD RS 232C RS 4 4 RS nieras interface CS 5 5 CS 6 6 7 7 SG 8 8 z SG 9 Shielding E Z wire a E 7 sal or a TS 20 ER 25 pin connector Connecting an NT20S to a C Series CPU COCOH e C Series CPU Unit COOH 9 pin Connector Specifications e Applicable CPU C20H C28H C40H C60H e Electrical characteristics Complies with EIA RS 232C e Signal direction Signal input and output is relative to the PC FG RD AXD a Requesttosend ass SG GND 258 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host Appendix G e Wiring Connections The NT20S does not use pin 4 RS or pin 5 CS Short the RS and CS pins o
180. ems to set when creating thumbwheel type numeral settings Number of input digits for positive values when there is a sign display When a sign display is set for a thumbwheel type numeral setting a maximum of 7 digits can be input for positive values e Display size One of two sizes can be selected small in which each digit comprises two touch switch units and medium in which each digit comprises three touch switch units Note that if small is selected the area in which the numerical value is displayed is also the touch switch input area 148 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 e Shape end plates Set which of the two shapes shown below will be used One has end plates at right and left sides and the other does not With Without e Restrictions on display attributes The following restrictions apply to display attributes Character type Wide size only Character enlargement Standard only regardless of the display size specification Zero suppress No zero suppression only See Numerals Which can be Displayed page 127 149 150 SECTION 5 How to Use the Host Link NT Link This Section describes in concrete terms how to use the Host link NT link C200H direct communication with the NT20S
181. en display the backlight is off Note 2 Priority registration is only valid when NT link 1 N is set 154 Overview of Direct Connection Operations Section 5 1 The PT status control area PC to PT can be allocated to the following PC areas Symbol C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Internal Special Relay NE Internal Special Relay O HR polar O S AR pay ey O Aaa ey LR jlmkreey O O OK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays ofthe CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use Correct Use Make sure there is no duplication in the PT status control area allocations and PT status notify area allocations Reference When NT link 1 N is set the PT status control area must be set for each con nected PT Notifying the Display Elements by Using Allocated Bits and Words The NT20S will operate as follows in the display element notification operation NT20S operation The NT20S will write any changes in the contents of the numeral or character string memory table being displayed or pressing of a touch switch to the bits and words area in the PC NT20S operation example Touch switen 12 G Bit009012 Bit 009012 0N 009012 0 DMO0110 0432 a moro ODO TOTO Y vogo12 1 DM0110 0 4 3 2 Numeral memory table 100 Numeral memory table0 0_4 3 2 Number of saved words 1 Copy First wo
182. en registered 10 Unit No 2 Priority registration lamp ON when registered 11 Unit No 3 Priority registration lamp ON when registered 12 Unit No 4 Priority registration lamp ON when registered Unit No 5 Priority registration lamp ON when registered Unit No 6 Priority registration lamp ON when registered Unit No 7 Priority registration lamp ON when registered This is the port of the communication port 8_ UnitNo 3 Communication in progress flag ON when connected 4 Unit No 4 Communication in progress flag ON when connected __ Unit No 5 Communication in progress flag ON when connected 6 Unit No 6 Communication in progress flag ON when connected 7 Unit No 7 Communication in progress flag ON when connected 8 Unit No 0 Priority registration lamp ON when registered 9 Unit No 1 Priority registration lamp ON when registered 10_ Unit No 2 Priority registration lamp ON when registered 11 Unit No 3 Priority registration lamp ON when registered 12 Unit No 4 Priority registration lamp ON when registered 192 NT20S Status Control Section 5 4 e Continuous buzzer bit 13 and intermittent buzzer bit 12 Inthe case of both buzzers when the respective bit is ON the buzzer sounds and when it is OFF the buzzer does not sound The continuous buzzer sounds continuously without interruption The intermittent buzzer sounds for 0 5 seconds at 0 5 second intervals If
183. en written first and is changed unex pected memory table may possibly be changed Allocated words that the NT20S reads The NT20S reads the allocated words in the PC for the memory tables which need to be displayed Even when a copy source memory table is allocated to a PC word if its contents are never displayed it will be used only at initialization Use of the copy type Copy will not be executed when the copy type is other than 0 or 1 The memory table copy is executed only when the contents of the area are changed To repeat copying of the same copy source and same copy destination write a value other than 0 or 1 for the copy type and then write a correct value again Copying a numeral memory table If the display method or the number of registered words include discrepancies a numeral memory table may not be copied and displayed correctly 175 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 Application Example of Copying of a Character String Memory Table This example gives a PC program to switch the character string display on the screen by using the memory table copy operation as the allocated bit is turned ON and OFF e Support tool settings Allocate the memory as shown below by using the support tool PT status control area allocation Word 0100 Contents registered to the screen Character string memory table 4 Character string memory table 4 Character string memory table s
184. er 4 4 digit input e PC program Create the following PC ladder program 11211 MOV 21 1 111 Notification word for content upgrade memory table f DM0105 Word that stores the numeral memory table number Numeral setting strobe flag e Program operation 1 When the numeral setting strobe flag bit 11211 comes ON 1 the contents of CH 0111 the word where the content upgrade memory table is located are transferred to DM 0105 The number of the numeral memory table that con tains the upgraded data is stored in DM 0105 in this case it is 0003 or 0004 If the numeral memory table is allocated to a PC word the value input to it can be read easily by referring to the allocated word In this case the contents of numeral memory table 3 are stored in DM 0005 and the contents of numeral table 4 are stored in DM 0006 NT20S Status Control Section 5 4 5 4 NT20S Status Control The statuses of the NT20S can be controlled from the PC by writing control data to the PT status control bits of the PT status control area allocated in the PC memory MA serenor PT status control area Screen switch setting Buzzer sounds Copy memory table setting s E lt Control data 5 4 1 Controllable NT20S Functions PT status control bits of the PT status control area 1514131211109 8 765 4 3 21 OBit ner PT status control bits 0 0 PT status control designation L
185. er Control Command is used to control the buzzer status of the NT20S To inhibit the display of the system menu or cancel this inhibition use the Mode Switch Enable Command Touch switch data input or host notification can be inhibited or this inhibition can celed by using the Touch Switch and Function Key Disable Command or Touch Switch and Function Key Enable Command respectively Touch Switch Disable Format ESC U 2 1B 55 32 Description Disables touch switch and function key input and notification to the Host Reference Use the Touch Switch Enable Command refer to 6 5 Touch Switch Enable to use a disabled touch switch again Disabled touch switches are also enabled when the NT20S power is turned off Touch Switch Enable Format ESC Vv 2 1B 56 32 Description Enables input and notification to the Host of a disabled touch switch or function key Reference Disabled touch switches are also enabled when the NT20S power is turned off 214 Controlling the NT20S Status Section 6 5 Screen Display Control Format ESC P my 1B 50 o my Display on or off 0 30 on 1 311 off Description Turns off the backlighting Reference The screen is redisplayed if a touch switch is pressed e When a Display Specified Screen Command page 204 is sent the specified screen is displayed Buzzer Control Format ESC T my 1B 54 my Buzzer
186. er and the total number of continuous screens can be displayed in the top right corner of the screen This is called the page number dis play The page number is set when creating the screen data by using the support tool Refer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 All display elements except numeral setting can be used in the continuous screens The screen attributes set in the parent screen become effective in the continuous screens 123 Screen Display Section 4 3 Example continuous screens 1 3 Continuous screen 1 touch switch i y 4 touch switch Screen 20 gt 2 3 Continuous Screen 15 screen 2 1 touch switch A l 4 touch switch 3 3 Continuous Screen 5 screen 3 e Parent screen 10 e Child screens 20 15 and 5 When screen 10 continuous screen is designated screen 20 whichis page 1 of the continuous screens will be displayed Screen 15 or 5 can be displayed by using the touch switches Since screen 10 has been set for the continuous screens that screen cannot be displayed as an individual screen Switching the Continuous Screens by Using the Touch Switches Continuous screens can be switched by using the and touch switches which have the system key functions When creating the screen create touch switches Y and to
187. erals which can be displayed page 127 Sign display and display method Select whether or not the bar graph which indicates a value below 0 is dis played 130 Bar Graphs Section 4 5 To display a value below 0 Sign display Yes The bar graph is displayed in the range of 100 to 100 The middle of the bar graph indicates 0 pe display 60 A A A 100 0 100 Not to display a value below 0 Sign display No The bar graph is displayed in the range of 0 to 100 The end of the bar graph indicates O Values below 0 are indicated as 0 display 60 A A 0 100 e Differences in the bar graph display method according to the values The bar graph display method varies according to the value range 1 When the value is in the minus range The display varies as follows according to the sign display setting Sign display No Displayed as 0 Sign display Yes Displayed in the minus range 2 When the absolute value of the value is in the range of 100 to 999 The value is displayed as it is Sign display No The display will be as mentioned below according to the graph frame setting When the frame is displayed display 999 Y R A A Graph width 8 dots 0 100 131 Bar Graphs Section 4 5 When the frame is not displayed ne K display 1 dot wide space ex A A Graph wi
188. eration panel page 28 y Connect the power supply page 29 y Connect to the Host Host link page 32 nication page 58 e RS 232C page 63 NT link 1 N page 49 e e NT link 1 1 page 45 e e C200H direct commu Support tool Install support tools to the computer y Y Check the settings and communications Create the PC program le Transfer the screen data page 86 Start operation Reference As far as possible use NT series support tool Ver 2 Create the screens refer to Section 4 and the manuals for the support tools as the support tool For details on the support tools that can be used see Appendix F Function Restric tions Depending on the Support Tool page 255 19 Before Operating Section 1 7 Refer to the following manuals for the equipment and software Equipment or Software Manual Title Manual Number Support tools NT series Support Tool V028 E 1 Operation Manual Programming RS 232C Interface SYSMAC CV500 CV1000 CV2000 Operation Manual Ladder W202 E1 For a PC of the CVM1 series refer to the SYSMAC CV500 CV1000 CV2000 User s Manual Peripheral tools SYSMAC C series and CVM1 PCs SYSMAC Support Software W248 E1 Operateon Manual C series PCs SYSMAC C series and CVM1 PCs SYSMAC Sup
189. error messages are displayed even ifthe Automatic Reset memory switch is set e Procedure when a communication error occurs When an error message is displayed press the EXIT touch switch displayed on the screen The screen display will return to the RUN mode e Display of communication errors As shown below communication errors are displayed in the center of the screen together with a classification indicating whether they are receive or send errors Screen when an error has occurred during reception lt Error Description gt Parity Error Overrun Error Overflow Error Framing Error Buffer Overflow Time Out NAK Received Unit No Error FCS Error RECEIVING ERROR Screen when an error has occurred during sending SENDING ERROR lt Type of error gt Time Out 238 Maintenance of the NT20S Section 7 3 ACIA Communication parameters Check whether the parity bit frame length baud rate Parity Error conditions of communications set stop bit length and flow control settings of the PC incorrectly match the settings of the NT20S Framing Error Overflow Error Noise caused data corruption during Use a noise resistant cable if communication occurs O communication in an environment with high levels of noise verrun The connectors of the connecting Reconnect the cable cable are not connected correctly Buffer Overflow The NT20S receive buffer is full Lengthen the command transmission intervals If this
190. eset the screen data is checked However if any of the above occurs during the screen data transmission the screen may disappear and other unexpected problems may occur In the case of such problems set DIP SW2 1 to ON to initialize the memory For the memory initialization by using the DIP switch refer to the Initialization by using the DIP switch page 74 89 Starting the Operation Section 3 7 3 7 Switching to the RUN mode Reference Starting the Operation After completing the screen data transmission and setting the communication conditions connect the NT20S to the Host and start operation Press the Quit touch switch in the System Menu The start up screen in the RUN mode will be displayed If the NT20S has failed to start correctly e g the start up screen is not displayed an error message is displayed or the screen is not displayed at all refer to Section 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages page 237 and take appropriate action When using an NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 the screen displayed on startup is the one specified in the screen switch setting of the PT status control area When using an NT20S ST128 the startup screen is specified with the support tool when creating the screen data If no startup screen is specified screen No 1 be comes the startup screen If no screen data is registered for the startup screen the error message Screen not registered is displayed For de
191. ess to which number was input 3 digit hexadecimal 000 to 07F y 0 to 127 n n2n3n4 Input number data 4 digit BCD Description A number with 4 transferred digits set with the NT20S number setting function is reported to the Host with this command A Caution This command cannot be used for negative numbers Always set 8 as the num ber of transferred digits when negative numbers may be input 8 digit Number Input Notify Format ESC F dy do dg ny n2 ng ng n5 I 1B 46 MR ds ok E des A ok Mo 3 ok ne n7 ng CR eS Se E es 3 oD d dod3 Numeral memory table address to which number was input 3 digit hexadecimal 000 to 07F y 0 to 127 n n2n3n4N5Ngn73Mg Input number data 8 digit BCD Description A number with 8 transferred digits set with the PT number setting function is re ported to the Host with this command When a negative number is written n1 becomes F 464 and the number com prises 7 digits 212 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 6 4 Touch Switch Number Output from NT20S to Host Format ESC H my m CR 1B 48 OD mm Address of the pressed touch 2 digit hexadecimal 00 to E2 0 to 226 Description If a touch switch is pressed while the screen for which the Bit In Off attribute is set is displayed the address of the pressed touch switch is reported to
192. ethod the communication conditions must be set with the memory switches e Setting NT link 1 N Refer to Selecting the Host Communication Method page 78 e Setting the unit No of the connected NT20S Selecting Unit Numbers page 80 2 6 1 Compatible PCs The only OMRON PCs that can be connected in an NT link 1 N are the C series C200HX HG HE models When making a connection checkthe series and model of the PC to which the connection is being made and the type of host link unit that is installed The following is a list of the PCs that can be connected to the NT20S via a host link 1 N Parte oe CPU Units Connectable PC Series E Caan Using an Expansion Connectable to Communication Board C200HE CPU32 E C200HE CPU42 E CDE CPUE C200HE C200HG CPU33 E C200HG CPU43 E C200HG CPU43 E Anie Sead C200HG CPU63 E C200HG CPU53 E senes C200HG CPU63 E C200HX CPU34 E C200HX CPU44 E C200HX CPU44 E Gadoiy C200HX CPU64 E C200HX CPU54 E C200HX CPU64 E 2 6 2 Connecting the NT20S Units N Caution Reference Referring to the illustrations below and using a cable appropriate for the CPU unit s connector connect the NT20S units and the PC using RS 232C RS 422A con verter units type NT AL001 An NT link connection cable can be used as the RS 232C cable For details on making a connection cable refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host page 256 e After connecting the communica
193. ettings Number of e PC ladder program Create a PC ladder program as follows 176 09000 MOV 21 1 0004 Copy type copy destination memory table f 102 Copy destination word Error flag J MOV 21 0010 Copy source memory table 09000 101 Copy source word Y MOV 21 2 0004 Copy type copy destination memory table f 102 Copy destination word Error flag MOV 21 0011 Copy source memory table 101 Copy source word e Program operation 1 When an error occurs bit 09000 turns ON the NT20S displays the message Error 2 When the error is cleared bit 09000 turns OFF the NT20S display message reverts to Normal Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 5 25 Upgrading Bar Graphs Changing the Contents of Allocated Words The following describes the procedure to upgrade the bar graph display on the NT20S by changing the contents of the allocated words To change the bar graph display on the NT20S change the contents of the PC words to which the numeral memory tables have been allocated The bar graph display cannot use hexadecimal numbers If hexadecimal numbers are set the bar graph will not be displayed By writing a negative number whose most significant digit is F to the allocated word of a graph set as Sign display No the graph display will become 0 and the display will show 9 For
194. ettings display and use of the characters numeric values and graphs which change according to the system operation status and other conditions refer to Section 4 4 Memory Table page 126 The power of expression of the screen can be increased by giving various attrib utes such as the enlarged or reverse display to the characters and figures The character and figure attributes can be set in the edit screen when creating the screen data by using the support tool When using the NT20S ST128 RS 232C character strings can also be dis played in accordance with commands from the host independently of the current ly displayed screen this is the terminal function Types and Attributes of Characters and Figures The following types of characters can be input by using the support tool and be displayed during operation Ch t Dots Maximum Number of Elie z vertical x Character Set Characters Displayed in One ype horizontal Screen without overwriting Half height 8x8 Alphanumerics and 32 characters x 16 lines characters symbols 512 characters Normal 16x8 Alphanumerics and 32 characters x 8 lines characters symbols 256 characters Create by using the e Marks A mark is a graphic pattern created by combining 16 x 16 dots by using the sup port tool Marks can be handled the same as the wide size characters Up to 64 patterns can be defined within the total screen data using character code FF20 to FF5F e Enlarged displ
195. f the PC connector together see in the figure Connect the cable shielding wire to the connector cover and pin 1 at both the NT20S and CPU ends of the cable NT20S PC CPU Abbrevi Pin Pin Abbrevi atioon number number atioon 1 1 FG SD 2 2 SD RD 3 3 RD RS 232C RS 4 4 RS eos interface CS 5 5 CS n 6 6 Z 7 7 SG 8 E SG 9 Shielding E _ wire 9 pin connector Connecting an NT20S to a CVM1 CV Series Host Link Unit e CVM1 CV Series Host Link Unit Connector Specifications e Applicable host link unit CV500 LK201 e Electrical characteristics Complies with EIA RS 232C e Signal direction Signal input and output is relative to the PC Communication Port 1 25 pin Connector 4 14 Signal Name Abbreviation Signal Direction o eT oar Comesorone Fameg fo M J PA freme fo Oo 3 8 Spa o E a reve we o gt E 4 Tprequestiosend fas o 8 8 ps oteartosend fsces gt r ETT TT SGN ES a Soares eno o 19 25 48 opivaicomeatorss OO ME Data terminal ready ER DTR O Communication Port 2 9 pin Connector Comnector Ep Signal Direction Signal Name Abbreviation EA memoweton ee Comedorooer Frame ground re f som o s Receive data woe CO pa eesosa ass sa ol 9 signal ground senor 259 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host Appendix
196. fluence on the other bits in the word 185 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 5 3 Example of determination of touch switch status This example uses the touch switches as normal switches bits in order to use the NT20S as an operating panel e Support Tool Settings Make the following settings using the support tool Touch switch 10 Function Notify Bit Display attribute Light Control bit CHO5000 Run flag Guide message RUN Notify bit CH 06000 Touch switch 11 Function Notify Bit Display attribute Light Control bit CH 05000 Stop flag Guide message STOP Notify bit CH 06001 Data registered for the screen touch switch 10 touch switch 11 Touch switch 10 Line 1 RUN STOP Touch switch 11 186 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 5 3 e PC program Create the following ladder program 1 scan ON Touch switch 10 notify bit y y 11212 06000 YH 05001 Stop flag touch switch 11 control bit 06001 lt Touch switch 11 notify bit 05001 Touch switch 10 notify bit J 06000 06001 Y 05000 Run flag touch switch 10 control bit 05000 1 Touch switch 11 notify bit e Program operation The operation when the program is executed is presented below Execute program Stop flag 1 ON Stop touch switch Lit Press Run touch sw
197. for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host page 256 N Caution e After connecting the communication cable always secure it with the screws Otherwise the cable may disconnect causing operation to fail e The cable s tensile load is 30 N Do not subject it to loads greater than this Otherwise a discontinuity may occur causing operation to fail Connecting to a PC with a 25 pin Connector Use a connector cable with a 25 pin connector on one end and a 9 pin connector onthe other end NT20S side to connect the NT20S to a PC with a 25 pin connec tor Host link unit CPU unit NT20S SYSMAC C series PC CVM1 CV series PC RS 232C connector cable Use the following recommended cables OMRON Connector Applicable C500 LK203 C120 LK201 V1 25 pin to 9 pin E XW2Z 500S 5m C200H LK201 xmazsoos sm CV500 LK201 Connecting to a PC with a 9 pin Connector Use a connector cable with a 9 pin connector on both ends to connect the NT20S to a PC with a 9 pin connector NT20S Host link unit CPU unit SYSMAC C series PC CVM1 CV series PC RS 232C connector cable Note The connector cable wiring for the C series CPU unit COOH is different from that for the other PCs For details refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host page 256 34 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 4 Connecting the NT20S to a CVM1 CV Series Host Link Unit Communic
198. g either the numeric keys or the system keys Selection with the numeric keys Use the HOME gt M and keys By using these keys the cursor can be shifted between numeral setting areas in the way shown in the figure below ae 6563 gt 3200 HOME 1 4568 0000 gu 5107 lt 4624 Pressing the HOME key will shift the cursor to the area whose top left corner has the smallest XY coordinate sum the top left numeral setting input field in the example above Selection with the system keys When the f and system keys on the touch panel are pressed the cursor moves between the numeral setting areas by following the order in which they were created using the support tool For example if three numeral setting areas have been created the cursor can be moved between them following the order of creation as follows t key 1st area gt 2nd area 3rd area 1st area Y key 1st area 3rd area 2nd area 1st area If the numeral setting screen attribute is set to system the order of cursor motion when the f and y system keys are used can be changed For details refer to the NT series support tool operation manual V028 E1 L 145 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 Inputting Numerical Values Input numerical values using the following numeric keys touch switches numer als 0 to 9 A to F decimal poin
199. g operations such as programming console impossible e Switch off the system temporarily before replacing the NT20S when a fault oc curs for example If the power to the NT20S only is switched off the system stops immediately and this could cause an accident or damage machinery Host Connections by RS 232C Section 2 8 2 8 Host Connections by RS 232C Connect NT20S ST128 with an RS 232C Interface Unit installed to the host com puter with an RS 232C cable RS 232C connection allows a single NT20S to be connected to the host A computer or other control device with a built in RS 232C interface is a suitable host for connection to the NT20S 2 8 1 Host Computer Communication Settings Set the host communication conditions according to the following table Set to the same baud rate as the NT20S 2400 4800 9600 19200 Flow control RS CS control XON XOFF control None Note Set the same communication conditions at the NT20S and Host Refer to the appropriate instruction manuals for the method of setting the Host communication conditions Set to the maximum baud rate supported by both the NT20S and Host The communication condition settings of the NT20S ST128 are set with the RS 232C communication conditions memory switches For details refer to Set ting RS 232C Communication Conditions on page 82 2 8 2 Connector Pin Arrangement The RS 232C connection between the NT20S and Host is described below NT20S Interface
200. git write numeral table ESC D Copy memory table ESC 3 Lamp and touch switch display bit specification ESC K Lamp and touch switch display address specification ESC O Lamp and touch switch display status enguiry ESC R 2 Touch switch disable ESC U Touch switch enable ESC V 3 Screen display control ESC P Buzzer control ESC T Mode Transition Enable ESC W EXAMPLE PROGRAM Section 6 7 5580 5590 5600 5610 5620 5630 5640 5650 5660 5670 5680 5690 5700 5710 5720 5730 DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA DATA 3 Clear screen ESC amp Character specify size ESC Specify character enlargement ESC 5 Normal display ESC Set inverse display e End inverse display ESC Set flashing display ESC End flashing display ESC 2 Set cursor position ESC Specify displayed characters ESC 4 2 Draw polyline ESC 7 Draw circle ESC 8 233 234 SECTION 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance This section describes the action to take when NT20S errors occur and how to carry out maintenance and inspections to prevent the occurrence of errors Tal Hardware Faults acia dape 236 7 2 Responding to Displayed Err
201. h settings 18 6 are ON 2 is ON only if this is the last ALOO1 unit Everything else is OFF NT ALOO1 Dipswitch settings NT ALOO1 18 6 are ON Everything else is OFF Cable 1 Cable 3 RS 422 RS 422 NT ALOO1 NT ALOO1 NT ALOO1 RS 422 RS 422 RS 422 IN Pl PIM PIN RDA 6 6 RDA RDA RDB 5 5 RDA RDB SDA 4 4 3D4 SDA SDB 3 3 SDB SDB NT ALOO1 RS 232 IN It is extremely important that you have Pi this handshaking connection established or communication will not exist 2 D Reference When connecting the C200HX HG HE and an RS 232C RS 422 converter unit use a converter unit whose lot number is 15Y5 or later Converter units of lot num bers previous to 15Y5 cannot be connected 11 Direct Connection Function Section 1 4 1 4 Direct Connection Function The communication method applied between the NT20S ST121 EV3 and the PC is either a host link or NT link To connect an NT20S ST122 V1 and PC the C200H direct communication function is used The following describes the direct connection function available with the NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 and communication with a PC TheNT20S ST128 uses an RS 232C interface for communication with the PC refer to Section Communications by RS 232C The NT20S can be used to refer to the contents necessary for the display informa tion or to allocate the bits and words used for storing the input data to any area in the PC The NT20S can directly write and
202. h to which a numeral setting function has been allocated a Number Input Notify Command is sent to the host Notification and Control of Touch Switches If a touch switch is pressed the corresponding touch switch number or bit informa tion is sent to the Host Conversely to turn ON a touch switch or cause it to flash the touch switch or bit information is sent from the Host The type of data relating to the touch switch notification is specified with the bit input attribute in the screen attributes when creating the screen data with the sup port tool It is not permissible to use both notification and control by a touch switch number and notification and control by bit information on the same screen Press a START gt Touch switch or bit information Eza t Lighting command PENN it e Bit touch switch method bit input permitted setting If a touch switch is pressed bit information is sent in accordance with the posi tion of the touch switch It can be used as anormal bit input switch at the PC side When this method is used if more than one touch switch is pressed at the same time the information of all the pressed touch switches 0 to 63 is reported to the Host e Touch switch method bit input not permitted setting If the touch switch status is changed the touch switch number set when the touch switch is
203. han the specified character string length 4 digit Write Numeral Memory Table Format ESC C dy do d3 ny No ng n4 1B 43 e Se es BS ae See SE eS ee ee d dod3 Numeral memory table address of write destination 3 digit hexadecimal 000 to 07F y 0 to 127 n n2n3n4 Number data 4 digit BCD or 4 digit hexadecimal Description e Writes 4 digit number data decimal or hexadecimal to the specified numeral memory table Ifa 4 digit number data is written while an 8 digit numeral is displayed the lower 4 digits are updated A Caution This command cannot be used to write negative numbers Use the 8 digit Write Command refer to 6 3 8 digit Write Numeral Memory Table 8 digit Write Numeral Memory Table Format ESC D dy do d3 ny n2 ng n4 n5 I I 6 1B 44 o E o Oe Oe Ox o o gt qa ng n7 ng d d2d3 Numeral memory table address of write destination 3 digit hexadeci mal 000 to 07Fy 0 to 127 n n2n3n4n5ngn7ng Number data 8 digit BCD or 8 digit hexadecimal Description e Writes the 8 digit number data decimal or hexadecimal to the specified numer al memory table e To write a negative numeral decimal specify F 46p for ny in this case a 7 digit numeral is written 206 Memory Tables Section 6 3 Copy Memory Table Format
204. haracter LOCATE 43 0 PRINT Character specify size LOCATE 43 1 PRINT 0 NORMAL SIZE 16x8 LOCATE 43 2 PRINT 1 HALF SIZE 8x8 E26AGAIN LOCATE 43 3 INPUT MS IF M lt gt 0 AND M lt gt 1 THEN GOTO E26AGAIN SEND SENDS M RETURN RESCIZA T ei cacas Specify character enlargement LOCATE 43 0 PRINT Specify character enlargement LOCATE 43 1 PRINT 0 NO ENLARGEMENT LOCATE 43 2 PRINT 1 ENLARGE HEIGHT LOCATE 43 3 PRINT 2 ENLARGE WIDTH LOCATE 43 4 PRINT 3 2X2 ENLARGEMENT LOCATE 43 5 PRINT 4 3X3 TIMES ENLARGEMENT LOCATE 43 6 PRINT 5 4X4 TIMES ENLARGEMENT E2AAGAIN LOCATE 43 7 INPUT MS IF M 0 OR M 1 OR MS 2 THEN GOTO E2ASEND IF M 3 OR M 4 OR MS 5 THEN GOTO E2ASEND 229 EXAMPLE PROGRAM Section 6 7 4200 4210 4220 4230 4240 4250 4260 4270 4280 4290 4300 4310 4320 4330 4340 4350 4360 4370 4380 4390 4400 4410 4420 4430 4440 4450 4460 4470 4480 4490 4500 4510 4520 4530 4540 4550 4560 4570 4580 4590 4600 4610 4620 4630 4640 4650 230 GOTO E2AAGAIN E2ASEND SEND SENDS M RETURN ESC 2L T ti aaa Normal display RETURN MEG C522 To dadene ao i ace sein A E a ese Set inverse display RETURN PE SC 5532 3 Y rias als os End inverse display RETURN FRSC 2 a iaa Soave decays ue sere erase Severs Set flashing display RETURN FESC 25S 7 aiii das End flashing display RETURN ESC 2B 7 a
205. hat n n S m m or create another touch switch and write values to the host when digits are carried up or down 4 8 6 Settings for Numeral Settings The following settings are made for numeral settings during their creation with the supporttool Note that restrictions apply to several of the settings made for thumb wheel type numeral settings Settings e Referenced numeral memory table Set the number of the numeral memory table used to record the numerical value input using the numeral setting function e Number of digits in the input numerical value Set the number of digits in the numerical values that can be input A maximum of 8 digits total of integer and decimal fraction parts can be set However if there is asign display the maximum number of digits for negative values will be seven e Upper lower limits Ver 5 direct connection only Set the upper limit and lower limit separately The maximum number of digits in the set values is eight or seven if there is a sign display When the upper limit value and lower limit value are set as negative values set F as the eighth digit Example Upper limit value or lower limit value is 123 F0000123 e Display attribute Set attributes in the same way as for numeral display For details see Numerals Which can be Displayed page 127 Restrictions and Additional Settings for Thumbwheel Type Numeral Settings There are the following restrictions and additional it
206. he standalone function The screen number of the screen that will be displayed when a touch switch is pressed is set for that touch switch when the screen data is created using the sup port tool If the touch switch is pressed during operation the screen whose number was designated will be displayed Simultaneously the PC Host will be notified of the screen number of the screen selected for display Touch switch To next screen pressed once gt Screen 5 Screen 5 set for touch switch 1 To set a screen number for a touch switch use Touch SW Bit specification and Screen switch of the support tool Only one screen number can be set for one touch switch within one screen or within one overlapping screen Numeral Setting Section 4 8 4 7 3 System Key Functions The NT20S allows the allocation of system key functions to touch switches The system key functions can then be used during operation by pressing the touch switches to which they have been allocated For example if when a screen for which buzzer sounding has been set is dis played a touch switch is also displayed the buzzer can be stopped by press ing this touch switch To set asystem key function for atouch switch use Touch SW Bit specification and Numeric key of the support tool Allocation of System Key Functions The system key functions are allocated to
207. he word type and the first word pa Batawemoy O pasamos 0 en IiematSpecaReay O _ IntemalSpecaireay O FLAN Er ENVIO EA NTC CNT Counter Counter Ea FR lang aay oa oe aR Rowley Rey CAN LN i AN O OK A 1wordonly x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 278 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 5 2 1 Displaying the Contents of Allocated Words of Memory Tables Therelationship between the contents ofthe allocated words of numeral and char acter string memory tables and the display is described below e Contents of the numeral memory tables Numerals are stored in the allocated words as shown below Stored as a single word 15 to 12 11 to 8 7 to 4 3 to O Bit Example 1234 15 to 12 11 to 8 7 to 4 3 to 0 Bit Stored as a double words Word 15 to12 11 to 8 7 to 4 3 to O Bit Example 12345678 Word 15 to12 11 to 8 7 to 4 3 to O Bit e Displaying the numeral memory table Numerals can be displayed in three different ways according to the contents of the numeral memory table as mentioned below The most significant digit digit 4 of a single word or digit 8 of a double word is processed in different ways Hexadecimal display All digits are handled as stored in the allocat
208. he NT20S make settings with the support tool for use with the NT20S NT series Support Tool Version 2 0 Edit Screen Tool Settings Exit C OMRON Corporation 1995 All Rights Reserved Select Tool Settings Tool Settings JPT Type T20M NT208 ST121 124 TEOCM ONT600S ONT30 emory Size 32 KB BAKB 96KB 1024KB Direct Access Vers m yerd Verb Direct Macn Type m NONE OMRON _ Printer Epson Dot Matrix Sheet Feeder es o buse Use Auto movemnt o AutoMvmnt ONot used Communication Port C O COM Ocompunication Mode Standard Hi speed ork Directory Data Directory IDE To specify the type as the model press fl TEESE 7 To create the NT20S screen data make settings in the Tool Settings screen as follows 112 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data Section 4 1 NT20S ST121 EV3 Host link NT link NT20S ST122 V1 C200H direct communication PT Setting 20S Memory Size 96 KB Direct setting Ver 4 or Ver 5 Direct Macn Type OMRON NT20S ST128 RS 232C PT Setting NT20S Memory Size 96 KB Direct setting None Direct Macn Type OMRON 4 1 2 Creating Screen Data Screen Data Creation Method The screen da
209. he robot arm moves up and goes out when it stops moving up 180 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 5 3 5 3 3 Allocated Bits and Display of Touch Switches Method for PC Notification and NT20S Control Two types of bit can be allocated to touch switches notify bits which serve to notify statuses to the PC and control bits lamp bit which control the lighting flashing of the touch switches For other types of function only lamp bits can be allocated When atouch switch is pressed the notify bit status changes and when the lamp bit is ON the touch switch lights or flashes Lights In order to notify the status of a touch switch to the PC the touch switch must be allocated to a specified PC bit so that it can be managed Designate the area and bit number To use touch switches for notification to the PC the following settings must be made using the support tool touch switch bit setting notify bit e Types of notification operation When using Ver 5 of the direct connection function the notification operation when the touch switch is pressed can be selected from the following four types with Ver 4 direct connection the type is fixed as momentary Momentary When the touch switch is pressed the bit comes ON when it is released the bit goes OFF Alternate Each time the touch switch is pressed the bit status changes from ON to OFF or OFF to ON Set When the t
210. he specified purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying Programmable Terminals to the abovementioned applications Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where dan ger to human life or serious damage is possible or for emergency switch applica tions Safety Precautions Safety Conventions and their Meanings xiv A DANGER N WARNING AN CAUTION Read these safety precautions carefully and make sure you understand them be fore using the Programmable Terminal so that you can use it safely and correctly This operation manual uses the following conventions and symbols to indicate cautions warnings and dangers in order to ensure safe use of the PT The cau tions warnings and dangers shown here contain important information related to safety The instructions in these cautions warnings and dangers must be observed The conventions used and their meanings are presented below Indicates information that if not heeded is likely to result in loss of life or serious injury Indicates information that if not heeded could possibly result in loss of life or se rious injury Indicates information that if not heeded could result in relatively serious or minor injury damage to the product or faulty operation Safety Precautions ZN WARNING
211. he touch switches on the NT20S e Controlling the NT20S by a PC The following NT20S functions can be controlled by a PC Screens Display of designated screens confirmation of screen numbers etc Memory tables Writing to a memory table copying from a memory table to another memory table etc Lamps and touch switches Display instructions confirmation of display status etc System control Buzzer ON OFF backlight ON OFF and other NT20S status Notifying from the NT20S to a PC Data in the NT20S is sent to a PC when a touch switch is pressed The following types of data are sent to a PC NT20S status Touch switch status Numerical values input with touch switches by using the numeral setting func tion Changes in a memory table after copying between memory tables Functions of Display Elements e Lamps Allocation destination Bit NT20S PC lt Lamp 1 Lit Switch 1 ON Bit 000100 Switch 2 OFF Bit 000101 Lamp 2 Bit 000101 PC s bit status is displayed by the Lamp on the NT20S The lamp comes on flashes when the PC s bit status lamp bit is ON 1 and goes off when it is OFF 0 15 Communications with PC by Direct Connection Section 1 5 e Touch switches Allocation destination Bit Touch switch 12 Bit 009012 NT20S 0096 all Bit 009012 ON The lamp comes on flashes when the PC s control bit is ON 1 and goes off when it is OFF 0 When the
212. heck the touch panel by performing the touch panel test in the I O check in the maintenance mode PC mode changes to The NT20S changes the mode This is normal with the NT20S specification When monitor mode during host link communication using a PC that can also be connected using the NT link connect it with the NT link the mode is not changed when using the NT link 236 Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages When the NT20S displays an error message find the corresponding symptoms in the appropriate table below and respond by following the Remedy indicated in the table 7 2 1 Errors Occurring when the Power is Turned ON The table below shows the errors that can occur when the power supply to the NT20S is turned ON and their remedies Screen Data Corrupted There is an error in the registered After initializing the screen data memory in the screen data Maintenance Mode transmit the screen data once more with the support tool Mark Data Corrupted There is an error in the registered After initializing the screen data memory in the mark data Maintenance Mode transmit the screen data once more using the support tool No direct information is The allocated words for the PT Use the support tool to set the head words of the PT set status control area and PT status status control area and PT status notify area and NT20S ST121 EV3 notify area have not been set
213. hing and Unlit Touch Switch Statuses Changing the Status of Allocated Bits on page 183 Lamp and Touch Switch Display Bit Spec ification on page 210 and Lamp and Touch Switch display Number Specifica tion on page 210 For details on how the statuses of touch switches are ascertained by the Host re fer to Notifying the Host that a Switch has been Pressed Determining Touch Switch Status on page 183 and Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Enqui ry on page 211 e Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage is possible or for emergency switch applications e Press touch switches with a force of no greater than 30 N e Do not press touch switches carelessly while the backlight is off or while nothing is displayed on the screen Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably Only press touch switches after confirming system safety e If touch switches are pressed in rapid succession their inputs may not be suc cessfully received Confirm that the input of a touch switch has been successfully received before moving on to the next operation Caution on pressing touch switches at 3 points When multiple touch switches are created at the relative positions indicated in the example below malfunctions may occur due to the characteristics of this switch configuration Example 1 When switches are created at positions A and B and
214. iblewithWT20M DT131 Screen data memory Built in flash memory only Optional select from EP ROM SRAM and EEP ROM Screen data memory 96KB 128 KB max capacity Outside dimensions 190 x 110 x 58mm 220 x 110 x 82mm Note Ifa system key function is required on continuous screens or for numerical setting or buzzer stop use a support tool and set the touch switches which have the sys tem key function in such screens For details refer to System Key Functions on page 139 Functions of NT20S Section 1 2 1 2 4 Differences Between Existing Models and NT20S ST121 EV3 The differences between the existing NT20S ST121 NT20S ST121 V1 ST122 V1 ST121 V2 models for direct connection and the upgraded version NT20S ST121 EV3 are indicated in the table below ST121 ae Communication type Host link NT link 1 1 con ST121 V1 e Host link NT link 1 1 nection built in Host link NT link 1 1 con SS FtRROHINE link nection built in 1 N connection built in ST122 V1 C200H direct communication built in 20S 20M compatible mode available support tool Refer to the PC Connection Operation Manual V042 E1 L Differences between NT20S ST12 and NT20S ST16 e The only way in which NT20S ST161 differs from NT20S ST121 is that the dis play is a monochrome liquid crystal display Functionally the NT20S ST121 and NT20S ST161 are absolutely identical and therefore if you are using an
215. if currently O and to O OFF if currently 1 Set The allocated notify bit is forcibly switched to 1 ON Reset The allocated notify bit is forcibly switched to 0 OFF In order to determine the status of a touch switch the status of the touch switch notification bit allocated to it is determined The touch switch notify bits can be allocated to the following areas of the PC memory m Batawemoy O Daawenoy 0 ox frieraSpeca Relay O remap n 0 a EA EI e feom ACI fom ANC HR r O a AR Airy Relay O aeyn m fwe o fp O OK x NG Since all the CVM1 CV series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the system they cannot be used for applications not related to the system The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type See Appendix L PC Memory Map page 278 of the APPENDICES for more details When making a data memory DM specification specify the bit number 00 to 15 following the word number Procedure 1 Use the support tool to allocate the touch switch notify bits to the PC memory 2 Whencreating the screen data using the support tool register the touch switch for a screen 3 Create aPC program to determine whether the touch switch notify bit is ON or OFF 184 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 5 3 The touch switch notification operations are as follows Type of Notification When Using Host Link or When Using C200F Direct Commu
216. iguration Section 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 10 System Configuration Reference This section gives the basic configuration of a system which uses an NT20S Refer to the manual for individual device for information on the equipment other than the NT20S in the system Refer to Section 3 5 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches on page 75 for the communication method and the conditions of communications between the NT20S and the Host It is impossible to connect a computer to use a support tool and a Host together at the same time except when using an NT20S ST122 V1 The principal optional devices for NT20S are as follows Replacement backlight NT20S CFLO1 one white light Anti glare sheet NT20M KBA04 five sheets in a pack Chemical resistant cover made of silicone rubber NT205 KBAO1 Host Link NT Link 1 1 C200H direct Systems NT20S Host PC manufactured by OMRON personal computer etc Controls NT20S as required while controlling machines and monitoring the production line Host link C series CQM1 CVM1 CV series PC C H CQM1 C200HS CVM1 CV series NT20S can be connected directly to the CPU unit CVM1 CV series NT20S can be used with version EV1 and subsequent versions Note that the C series requires a host link unit In the CVM1 CV series system the NT20S can be connected also to the host link unit NT link CQM1 CVM1 CV series PC e When using host l
217. ing display 120 127 Reverse display o oooooooooo 120 127 Revision history asean srr een cece ee eee 287 Rotary switch To ri 0 2 eee eee 25 S Safety precautions oooocccococccco xiv Sreo iaa a rri 118 Screen 0 occcccccc eee eee 236 Screen NO 1 1 6 eee eee 90 Screen attributes 0 0c eee eee 125 Screen data s reris ca wwe ed wes 86 237 Screen data displayed on the NT20S 9 Screen data memory 00 eee eee eee 72 Screen display ooooococcococcc 192 Screen display control oo o o o o 215 Sereen ISU ate tdi canos 115 Screen number 00 cece eee ees 118 Screen number 0 2 cee eee eee 118 Screen number response 0 205 Screen switch setting oo 157 Screen switching 000e eee eee ee 138 Screen switching strobe 158 160 196 Screen switching timing 158 Selecting communication speed 79 Selecting the host communication method 78 Selecting the items 0 ce eee 71 Selecting the numeral setting area for data inputs sce eaa ees ahah ate aa 145 SOL lees Ge ces carte eee dae Gn casa tated eae ale 181 Set cursor positi0N ooooo oooooooo 220 Set flashing display ooooo oooomoo 219 Set inverse display 000000 218 SAM es ras ee E e 107 Setting a screen number for a TOUCA SWI
218. ing the thumbwheel type of numeral setting the maximum number of digits for both positive and negative numbers is 7 Decimal point A maximum of 7 digits can be input after the decimal point or 6 for negative numbers e Hexadecimal input When the display attribute is set for hexadecimal display values are input in the hexadecimal format Numerical value range Numerical values can be input in the range 0 to FFFFFFFF 8 digits e Attributes that can be set The attributes of the numerical values displayed in the input field are the same as for numeral displays See Numerals Which can be Displayed page 127 Upper lower limit check Ver 5 direct connection only When Ver 5 direct connection is used with an NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 up per and lower limits can be set for input numerical values to prevent erroneous val ues that are outside the valid range being stored in the numeral memory table or notified to the PC The upper lower limit check is executed when the input numerical value has been confirmed if the value is outside the valid range the screen returns to its status before input Correct Use In order to use the numerical value input setting safely always use the upper lower limit check function Since this function is not featured with NT20S ST128 and Ver 4 and previous versions of the direct connection function take appropriate measures using the user application software 141 Numeral Setting Sec
219. ink NT CQM1 can be used with CPU41 42 43 44 E link RS 232C C200HS can be used with CPU21 23 31 33 E Es CVM1 CV series can be used with EV1 CPU unit and RS 2926 cable subsequent versions for host link Max 15 m RS 232C Personal computer FA computer i C200H direct communication e When using C200H direct C200H C200HS C200HX HG HE COOH PC communication I O connection cable E Support tool eens ae ml lt au J Gives displays of production line monitoring and instructions to the Computer support tool operation site and notifies the switch Connected to NT20S as required and used to transfer ON OFF status and numeric value the NT20S screens and make settings for the NT20S inputs to the Host Computer IBM PC AT or compatible Support tool NT ZA3AT EV2 System Configuration Section 1 3 1 3 2 NT Link 1 N Systems When NT20S is connected to a PC in a 1 N connection use an RS 232C cable and RS 422 485 cables PLEASE NOTE The second digit DM Setting to set signifies the max for 1 N NT Link of PT Nodes for 1 N NT Link C200HX Setup Com 06 Port A e g 1 2 PT Nodes NT20S Setup NT20S Setup 7 8 PT Nodes 1 N NT Link 1 N NT Link DM6655 5700 System will not Unit 0 Unit 1 accept a 0 zero Cable 2 NT205 EVI Cable 2 NT205S EV3 RS 232 RS 232 Dipswitc
220. ion Environment Observe the following points when installing the PT in an operation panel A Caution Do not install the NT20S at sites subject to the following conditions Otherwise the product may malfunction e Severe temperature variations e Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications e High humidity condensation e Splashing chemical agents e Severe oil splashing e Corrosive or flammable gases e Strong vibrations or shocks e Direct exposure to wind and rain outdoor sites e Strong ultra violet irradiation Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the NT20S is used at a location subject to any of the following conditions e Static electricity or noise from other equipment e Strong electric or magnetic fields e Nearby power cables e Potential exposure to radioactivity 27 Installation Section 2 2 2 2 2 Installation to the Operation Panel The NT20S can be flush mounted to an operation panel Use the panel fittings and tools included in the product package and follow the pro cedure below ZA Caution During work at the panel take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the unit Otherwise the product may malfunction Note The thickness of applicable operation panel is 1 6 mm to 4 8 mm All fittings must be tightened uniformly to a torque of at least 0 5 to 0 6 N cm in order to ensure water and dust resistance The panel must not be soiled or warped and must be able to s
221. ion to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 6 RS 422A Cable Wiring e RS 232C connection at the PC side NT AL001 RS 422A terminal block Abbrev Pin No Functional ground NT ALOO1 Pin No Abbrev SDB SDA RDB RDA Oo RO a Shielding wire e RS 422A connection at the PC side PC RS 422A interface Abbrev Connector cover Functional ground SDB SDA RDB O N A O0O RDA RS 422A terminal block NT ALOO1 Pin No Abbrev SDA SDB RDA RDB RS 422A Cable Wiring O Shielding wire Functional ground SDB SDA RDB Oj Ajj RDA RS 422A terminal block NT AL001 Pin No Abbrev Functional ground SDB SDA NT ALOO1 Abbrev Pin No Functional ground 1 RS 422A SDB 3 terminal block SDA 4 RDB 5 RDA 6 RDB Shielding wire Oya R O RDA RS 422A terminal block 53 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 6 e RS 485 connection C200HX HG HE OMRON PC While controlling machinery and monitoring lines controls the NT20S units when necessary lt C200H HG HE can be used RS 232C cable max length 2 m or directly connected RS 485 cable RS
222. ique codes to speci fy individual character strings etc 171 Memory Tables and Bar Graphs Section 5 2 172 Procedure 1 2 Set the PC area for allocation ofthe numeral memory table to be referenced in indirect specification using the support tool When using the support tool to create screen data register on the screen the numeral memory table referenced in indirect specification Specify the indi rect option for the reference method In the case of a character string use the character display function of the support tool to specify the numeral memory table Inthe case of a numerical value use the numeral display function of the sup port tool to specify the numeral memory table Use the table edit function of the support tool to write the actually displayed data to the memory table for display If displaying a numerical value use a nu meral memory table and if displaying a character string use a character string memory table Create a PC program to change the contents of the word allocated to the nu meral memory table referenced in the indirect specification e Notes on writing memory table numbers When writing the number of the memory table for display to the numeral memory table referenced in indirect specification always specify it in BCD Also be sure to specify a number within the range of memory table numbers that actually exist 0 to 127 If the contents of the numeral memory
223. is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the in formation contained in this publication PRECAUTIONS cipal ia va 1 2 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS Intended Audience General Precautions Safety Precautions SECTION 1 Functions of the NT20S o ooooooooo ooo 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 Role and Operation of NT20S 0 cee AA EEEE ee ee eee Functions of NT20S System Configuration Dir ct Connection FUNCTION 2 a a ee eae emis Communications with PC by Direct Connection 0 00 eee eee eee eee ee Communications by RS 232C 0 eee cc cence ene ene Before Operating SECTION 2 Hardware Settings and Connections o o o 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 System Menu Operation oooooooooo ooo 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 Description of Parts and Settings 0 0 0 eee eee eee Installation Connecting to the Support Tool paraa ea nsei a a E A ce A Connection to a PC by the Host Link 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee Connection to a PC by the NT Link 0 0 eee eee eee eee Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N 0 eee ee eee eee Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication
224. isplay the Number of Currently Displayed Screen The following describes the processing to display the number of currently dis played screen of the NT20S This processing reads the data from the PC status notify area To indicate that the screen has switched use the screen switch strobe flag To display the number of the currently displayed screen use the currently dis played screen word When the screen has switched the NT20S notifies the following to PT status notify area PT to PC allocated to the PC Screen switch notification Screen switch strobe flag of the PT status word New screen number Currently displayed screen word By reading the currently displayed screen word when the screen switch strobe flag has turned ON the number of the currently displayed screen on the NT20S is dis played NT20S PT status notify area gt Currently displayed screen lt Screen number Currently Content upgrade memory table etsy PT status lt Screen switch strobe flag Currently displayed screen and PT status words in the PT status notify area 1514131211109 8 76543 21 OBit Word are P in Screen number 4 digit BCD Screen switch setting CF NT T m 2 PT status 0 0 PT status 1 Los 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Bit lolo lololo t Screen switch strobe Screen number 0001 to 0500 Use a 4 digit BCD binary coded decima
225. it back ON 1 to redis play the screen Reference Instead of turning Bit 15 ON a screen can be displayed by specifying its screen number For details on screen switching see Switching the Screen Display page 157 e Priority registration for processing NT link 1 N connections only bit 14 It is possible to register one of the multiple PTs connected by the 1 N NT link method to have processing priority The PT for which bit 14 is set ON 1 is given priority over the other PTs and has a higher response speed for display touch switches etc When bit 14 is turned OFF 0 this registration is canceled and the normal re sponse speed is reinstated If priority registration is set for more than one PT the one for which the registration was made last will have priority By monitoring C200HX HG HE words the unit number of the PT for which prior ity registration has been set can be confirmed For details on the monitoring op eration at the PC side refer to the manual for the PC used Connection to RS 232C port of C200HX HG HE eee Unit No 3 Communication in progress flag ON when connected Unit No 4 Communication in progress flag ON when connected Unit No 5 Communication in progress flag ON when connected Unit No 6 Communication in progress flag ON when connected Unit No 7 Communication in progress flag ON when connected Unit No 0 Priority registration lamp ON when registered Unit No 1 Priority registration lamp ON wh
226. itch Press Stop touch switch Run flag 1 ON Run flag 0 OFF Run touch switch Lit Run touch switch Unlit Stop flag 0 OFF Stop flag 1 ON Stop touch switch Unlit Stop touch switch Lit 187 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 5 3 5 3 6 188 Notification of Numbers to the PC Word m 1 m 2 The following describes how the numerical data input at the NT20S by using the numeral setting function is ascertained by the PC In order to determine when numerical data has been input at the NT20S the nu meral setting strobe flag in the PT status notify area is used In order to determine the upgraded numeral memory table number the content upgrade memory table in the PT status notify area is used When numerical data is input at the NT20S this is automatically notified to the PT status notify area PT PC allocated in the PC memory as follows Notification of upgrade PT status numeral setting strobe flag turned ON 1 Upgraded numeral table number Stored in the content upgrade memory table When the PC reads the content upgrade memory table at the leading edge of the numeral setting strobe flag it determines the numeral memory table number in which the numerical data that was changed at the NT20S is stored DES Numeral memory table 1 12345678 12345678 PT status notify area tly displayed scre Content upgrad lt Table No memory table P
227. ith the memory switch for host link baud rate For the details refer to Selecting the Host Link Com munication Speed page 79 2 The 1 to N setting enables BCC Block Check Character It is not possible to connect more than one NT20S in a single host link When using CVM1 CV series always set CPU execution processing execution control 2 in the PC system settings to simultaneous processing Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 4 Connecting to a Host Link Unit Two types of host link units are available a rack mounting type and a CPU mounted type The switch settings differ according to the type of host link unit Set the switches according to the unit type e C200H rack mounting type C200H LK201 V1 Setting the front switches Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following e Unit SW1 SW2 Set these switches to 0 e Instruction level parity and transfer code SW4 Set this switch to 2 e Baud rate SW3 Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps Setting the rear switches e 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP switch Set 3 to ON CTS selector switch External e CTS selection selector switch Set this always to OV ON C500 C1000H C2000 H rack mounting type C500 LK201 V1 Setting the front switches e M
228. k 1 ON A Touch switch 1 The status of the lamp bit reflects the touch switch status as follows O OFF Unlit 1 ON Lit inverse display or flashing Procedure 1 Use the support tool to allocate the touch switch lamp bits to the PC memory 2 Whencreating the screen data using the support tool register the touch switch for a screen 3 Create the PC program to switch the lamp bit of the touch switch ON and OFF Set whether the lamp lights continuously or flashes when the bit comes ON by setting the touch switch display attribute with the support tool 5 3 5 Notifying the Host that a Switch has been Pressed Determining Touch Switch Status This section describes how the status of a touch switch whether it has been pressed or not is ascertained With the NT20S when a touch switch is pressed the notify bit allocated to that touch switch in the PC memory is automatically notified Touch switch 1 Jens Allocated notify bit touch switch 1 m 183 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 5 3 Depending on the set operation type the status of the allocated bit for touch switch status notification will be controlled in one ofthe following ways unless Ver 4 direct connection is used in which case the setting is fixed as momentary Momentary 0 OFF Not pressed 1 ON Pressed Alternate The allocated bit is switched to 1 ON
229. k menu will be redisplayed Reference If memory switch setting for the key press sound has been made for ON the key press sound will be made when a touch switch is pressed The statuses of touch switches pressed during an I O check are not notified to the host Checking the Communications with the Support Tool Execute a NT20S to support tool communication check by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below The NT20S ST121 EV3 ST128 uses the same connector for connection to the support tool and connection to the Host If this connector is currently connected to the host disconnect the cable from it and connect it to the support tool personal computer before attempting screen data transmission Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select I O Check MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch 100 System Maintenance Section 3 9 Select Comm Check 1 0 CHECK MENU Quit _ LCD Display LED Check Comm Check Buzzer Touch Switch Data Memory Select Tool I F COMM CHECK MENU Quit Tool I F The data received from the con TOOL I F INPUT CHECK nected support tool are dis played in hexadecimal num bers When the check is finished press the E
230. l value to set a screen number The screen switch strobe bit reverts to OFF 0 after this is notified to the PC 160 Overview of Direct Connection Operations Section 5 1 Procedure Reference e Available allocation words The PT status notify area PT to PC can be allocated to the following PC areas Symbol C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Internal Special Relay ME Internal Special Relay O HR rola O a AR poa Relay O poa ey Es ink ete of O OK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays ofthe CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 278 1 Use the support tool to allocate the PT status notify area PT to PC to the PC memory 2 CreateaPC program to read the currently displayed screen word in the in the PT status notify area when the screen switch strobe flag in the PT status notify area has turned ON The contents of the currently displayed screen word are updated also by switch ing the screen by pressing a touch switch on the NT20S For this function standalone function or screen switch function refer to the Stan dalone Function page 138 e Continuous screens and overlapping screens When a continuous or overlapping screen is displayed the number of the parent screen is written to
231. l at least 2 mm thick and secure the converter to the wall with screws p 30 1 18 100 3 94 i 110 4 33 o Unit mm in Note In order to ensure a strong installation the wall of the operation panel must be at least 2 mm thick 250 NT20S Installation Environment Appendix D APPENDIX D NT20S Installation Environment When installing the PT in the operation panel observe the following points See also the section Getting Starting e The view angle of the LCD display screen is 40 Install it at a position and height where operators will be able to see it well ZA Caution e Do not install at a site exposed to chemicals steam etc or subject to excessive airborne dust e Do not install the unit at locations where the ambient temperature goes outside the range O to 50 C or where the relative humidity goes outside the range 35 to 85 RH If the ambient temperature exceeds the range indicated above install a fan or an air conditioner e Do not install the unit directly above equipment that generates a lot of heat heaters transform ers large capacity resistors etc e Take the following points into account in order to prevent noise 4 Avoid installing the unit in panels in which high voltage equipment is also installed 5 Install the unit at a distance of at least 200 mm from power lines 6 If the unit is installed next to equipment that generates a strong electric or
232. layed character strings refer to Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words on page 169 and Write Character string Memory Table on page 205 When using the NT20S ST128 RS 232C character strings can be also dis played in accordance with commands from the host independently of the current ly displayed screen terminal function Refer to Specify Displayed Characters on page 220 Characters and Figures Which can be Displayed The power of expression of the screen can be increased by giving various attrib utes such as the enlarged or reverse display to the characters of the character string memory table The character attributes can be set in the edit screen when creating the screen data by using the support tool 126 Memory Tables Section 4 4 The following types of characters can be displayed on the NT20S Ch t Dots Maximum Number of Sta es vertical x Character Set Characters Displayed in One ype horizontal Screen without overwriting Half size 8x8 Alphanumerics and 32 characters x 16 lines characters symbols 512 characters Normal size 8x16 Alphanumerics and 32 characters x 8 lines characters symbols 256 characters Create by using the ay support tool INN e Enlarged display of the characters and marks The characters and marks can be enlarged to the following scales Double width scale Double height scale x4 scale x9 scale x16 scale e
233. lowing describes the fundamentals of the display elements NT20S status control and notification which are the basics of the NT20S functions when using the host link NT link For the detail method of use of the PT status control area and the PT status notify area refer to Sections 5 4 NT20S Status Control page 191 and 5 5 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC Determining the NT20S Operating Status page 196 Controlling the Display Elements by Using Allocated Bits and Words The NT20S will operate as follows in the display element control operation NT20S operation 1 The NT20S checks the allocation bits and words of the display elements and makes an inquiry to the PC The PC answers the NT20S about the bit and word data BD The NT20S changes the display status according to the bits and words ob tained from the PC NT20S operation example Lamp 0 Bit 010012 NT20S Bit 010012 TIM003 DMO0100 to DM0102 ae P b DM0101 c d DM0102 Ee P Character string memory table2 Numeral memory table0 First word DMO100 First word TIM003 Number of saved words 3 Number of saved words 4 153 Overview of Direct Connection Operations Section 5 1 Controlling the NT20S Status by Using Allocated Bits and Words PT Status Control Area PC to PT The PT status control area PC to PT is provided to control the NT20S status from the PC When data is written to this area in
234. mitted to the NT20S Screen data file Screen 1 Screen 2 Screen N Memory table Mark data System memory Direct information o Ee as a When the screen data is transmitted from the support tool to the NT20S the All screen data are transmitted by one operation NT20S Screen 1 Screen 2 Screen N Memory table Mark data System memory Direct information tent E E a screen data already existing in the NT20S will be erased If an error message and the System Menu are displayed immediately after the NT20S has been started the screen data memory needs to be initialized Registering the Screen Data Section 3 6 Data Transmission in Screen Units A Caution Reference The NT20S allows the transmission of data for specified screens By selecting the screen number of the screen to be transmitted using the support tool it is possible to transmit the required screen only to the NT20S it is also possible to transmit multiple screens in a batch When changes have also been made to the memory tables or direct connection information transmit the changed data to the NT20S too for example by using transmission in screen units Support Tool 2 eee NTDOS eo Screen 1 Only the required screen data is transmitted Screen N Memory table
235. mo o oo 179 5 3 3 Allocated Bits and Display of Touch Switches 0 0 e eee eee eee eee 181 5 3 4 Lit Flashing and Unlit Touch Switch Statuses Changing the Status of Allocated Bits 0 0 00 eee eee ee eee 183 5 3 5 Notifying the Host that a Switch has been Pressed Determining Touch Switch Status 00 ee eee eee eee 183 5 3 6 Notification of Numbers to the PC 0 ooooooooocoococcroco eee eens 188 NT20S Status Control it la lana 191 5 4 1 Controllable NT20S Functions 00 cece ec rr 191 5 4 2 How to Control NT20S Functions 0 0 eee eee ene 194 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC Determining the NT20S Operating Status 196 5 5 1 Ascertainable NT20S Statuses Notified Operating Statuses oo ooooooooo 196 5 5 2 Reading the NT20S Operating Statuses 00 eee eee eee ee 197 151 Overview of Direct Connection Operations Section 5 1 5 1 Overview of Direct Connection Operations This section explains allocated bits and words control ofthe NT20S and PC notifi cation methods and the actual procedures used for switching screens thereby providing the basic information required to use the NT20S ST121 EV3 host link NT link and NT20S ST122 V1 C200H direct communication 5 1 1 Equipment and Settings Used in This Section The following equipment and settings are used in the examples in this section Equipment PT NT20S ST121 EV3 PC CQM1 Supp
236. munication conditions are set with the rotary switch SW4 under the cover at the top right of the back of the terminal Rotary switch SW3 Connector for peripheral device 5 Setting the rotary switch The rotary switch is used to set the unit number Since the NT20S ST122 V1 serves as a C200H special I O unit it requires a unit number setting Make sure the set unit number does not duplicate the unit number set for any other special I O unit SW3 Factory setting 25 Description of Parts and Settings Section 2 1 26 Reference When using a C200H C200HS C200HX HG HE the words indicated below are occupied according to the set unit number However since the NT20S ST122 V1 executes processing using allocated bits and words these words are not used for processing These words can be used as internal auxiliary relays o T TC O 48 es Cannot be set with COOH e If 8 or 9 is set as the unit number when using COCH a special I O unit error will occur e When an NT20S ST122 V1 is connected to a COCH I O extension units can not be connected In other words it is not possible to connect another special 1 O unit so whatever unit number is set will not duplicate an existing one Installation Section 2 2 2 2 Installation Install the NT20S to the operation panel and connect the power to the NT20S as described below 2 2 1 Installat
237. munication conditions at the host and the NT20S You are rec ommended to set the highest baud rate that can be used by the host and NT20S The factory settings are as follows e Data Bits 8bits e Stop Bits 2bits e Parity Check Even e Flow Control None e Baud Rate 9600bps Set the conditions of the communication with the Host by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC Host with Memory Switches Section 3 5 Select Page down Key Press Sound ON Buzzer Sound ON Bk light Off 10min Automatic Reset Yes Data Bits 8bits Stop Bits 1bit Parity Check Even Flow Control RS CS Baud Rate 19200bps LMP Bit Control Enable The selected option displayed when the corresponding touch switch is pressed the options for each switch are indicated below e Data Bits 7bits 8bits e Stop Bits 1bit 2bits e Parity Check None Even Odd e Flow Control None RS CS XON XOFF e Baud Rate 2400bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps e LMP Bit Control Enable Disable
238. nable 4 Reserved OFF 1 2 3 4 EXIT 5w a e The NT20S DIP switch statuses are displayed e Pressing the EXIT touch switch clears the DIP switch status display from the screen and causes the NT20S to enter the RUN mode Note Ifthe DIP switch settings have been changed when the NT20S is powered reset the power to the NT20S The changes with the DIP switches become effective only after the power supply is reset 109 110 SECTION 4 NT20S Functions and Operation This section describes the functions of the NT20S 4 1 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data 0 eee eee ene 112 4 1 1 Setting the support tool for use with the NT20S 0 000 0000008 112 4 1 2 Creating Screen Data oct ie ie beat SA eas Wied E ae Woe ww Sonat 113 4 2 Outline of Functions 24 6 eren as aol es sede Sh be ek aii 118 42 TINT 20S STECH oscar adult sie al dad dates anaes sated 118 4 2 2 Characters and Figures Which can be Displayed 00 e ee eee eee 119 4 2 3 Communications with the Host 0 eee eee cece een eens 120 4 37 Screen O a EE A E E A Ba Se geese teeta er 122 4 3 1 Classification of Screens 1 0 0 eect eee nen eens 122 4 3 2 Scr en Attributes omo iconos iaa a ede ek ee eee aba ee ea ee 125 4 4 Memory Tables sis 5 0 covers e a da Ms ores ahs NA 126 4 4 1 Character String Memory Table 0 0 cece cece eee eee 126 4 4 2 Numeral Memory Table 0 0 eee cece eee nen een
239. nding to the PT sta tus control bit changes in order to perform the same control again the correspond ing bit must be specified again 194 NT20S Status Control Section 5 4 Example of Use of PT Status Control Bit The example below explains how operation with the PT status control bit can be used to use the NT20S like a warning lamp e Setting with the support tool Make the following setting with the support tool Allocated word for PT status control area CH 0100 e PC program Create the PC ladder program as follows 09002 09003 MOV 21 1 A000 Display screen sound buzzer continuously 103 PT status control word 09003 MOV 21 2 9000 Display screen sound buzzer continuously 09002 09003 103 PT status control word ANDW 34 3 103 PT status control word CFFF 0 set for continuous and intermittent buzzer 103 sounds only PT status control word e Program operation 1 The PT status control bits are set as shown below when bit 09002 turns OFF This command block is not executed when bit 09003 is ON Screen display bit 15 1 ON Continuous buzzer bit 13 1 ON The NT20S continuous buzzer sounds The PT status control bits are set as shown below when bit 09003 turns OFF Screen display bit 15 1 ON Intermittent buzzer bit 12 1 ON The NT20S intermittent buzzer sounds The PT status control bits are set as shown below when
240. nector cable Refer to 2 3 Connecting to the Support Tool page 31 The PT type direct connection Make the PT type setting and direct connection setting settings made at the support tool do in the tool settings of the support tool agree with the not agree with the NT20S NT208 Cannot communicate with Memory switch settings do not Check the communication setting in the Memory the PC Host match Switch menu of the Maintenance Mode and match the PC and NT20S settings Refer to 3 5 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC Host by Using the Memory Switches page 75 NT20S and PC are not correctly Check that the type length and installation of the connected connector cable match the specifications Refer to 2 4 Connection to a PC by the Host Link page 32 2 5 Connection to a PC by the NT Link page 45 and 2 8 Host Connections by RS 232C page 63 When NT link 1 N there is unit Set again with no duplication number duplication Power not supplied to the NT20S Check the power supply PC or host Buzzer sounds RUN LED Malfunction due to external noise Distance the communication cable from the source of the noise and insert a noise filter in the power supply line Touch panel does not Malfunction due to external noise Distance the communication cable from the source of respond the noise and insert a noise filter in the power supply line Touch panel is broken C
241. nication or NT Link with Operation NT Link with DM Area other than DM Area Momentary omo OFF units 3 Notification in bit units 2 Notification in word units Alternate however the word contents are read on display and noti 4 Notification in bit units fication is based on this reading When using touch switch input notification note the following points Inthe case of 1 the other bits inthe same word as the notification bit are turned OFF by the notification operation Press the touch switch Bit 15 14 ree 1 0 Bit 15 14 irae 1 0 0 1 011 010 110 Touch switch Bits other than notify notify bit bits are set to 0 OFF Inthe case of 2 notification is executed on the basis of the contents of the word before display which means that the other bits are not rewritten However ifthe word contents are changed at the PC side they will be rewritten based on the contents before display If the screen is switched while a momentary key is being pressed the touch switch itself disappears so the status OFF is notified In the case of 1 this means that the other bits in the word will also be turned OFF When using the host link or NT link with the DM area do not allocate momentary touch switches and other types of touch switch to the same word since the notifi cation operations are different In the case of 3 and 4 the notification operation has no in
242. ns and Wiring for OMRON Units The combination of pin numbers to which the connecting wires are connected differs according to the connector specifications for each unit Check the connector specifications of the unit to be connected and make the wiring connections for the items in the connection combination indicated below which are applicable NT20S Connector Specifications 9 pin e Electrical characteristics Complies with EIA RS 232C e Signal direction Signal input and output is relative to NT20S Signal Direction Connector Signal Name Abbreviation 2 Pin No Input 2 smaa O o Tomo RD AXD S a Reauestose ASAS Pees Voupu 150mAmax wv o ina grana a Correct Use Ifusing the 5 V supply of pin No 6 check first that the equipment that is to receive the supply has a current capacity no greater than 150 mA The 5 V output of the NT20S is 5 V 5 max 150 mA Connecting an NT20S to a C Series Host Link e C Series Host Link Unit 25 pin Connector Specifications Applicable Host Link Unit C200H LK201 V1 C500 LK201 V1 C500 LK203 C120 LK201 V1 e Electrical characteristics Complies with EIA RS 232C e Signal direction Signal input and output is relative to the PC Signal Direction 1 14 Connector Signal Name Abbreviation Pin No nput F E oa i D RS ATS CS CTS Signal ground SG GND Optical connector 5V see note 2 T R 000000000000 2000000000006 N see note 1 Data signal el
243. nts are automatically updated so that the contents of the numeral memory table being displayed are the same as that of the PC word There are two methods for referencing numeral memory tables used for numeral displays as follows Direct specification Indirect specification with Ver 5 direct connection only The only method available for numeral memory tables used for graphs and numer al settings is direct specification e Direct specification Direct specification is a method of specification in which the contents of displayed memory tables are directly correlated with the contents of the allocated words Allocated channel Direct Character string character string memory table 18 specification memory table 18 DMO100 0062 JO 0062 k ojo 6 2 e Indirect specification with Ver 5 direct connection only Allocated word Indirect Numeral numeral memory table 18 specification memory table 18 DM0100 7777 4 gt 0062 ojo 612 A Character Allocated word character string table 62 string memory table 62 DM0200 T 7777 gt 71 7 7 7 In indirect specification the contents numerical value of the specified numeral memory table are regarded as a memory table number and the contents of the table with this number are displayed Upto 50 numeral displays and 50 char
244. o 7 Set the unit numbers by following the menu operation from the System Menu de scribed below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Press the Comm Type touch MEMORY SW MENU 1 2 switch to select NT link 1 N Comm Type NT Link 1 N Select Page Key Sound OFF Buzzer Sound OFF Bk light Off None Tool Mode NT20M Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC Host with Memory Switches Section 3 5 Repeatedly pressing the Unit MEMORY SW MENU 2 2 No touch switch cycles Automatic Reset No through the numbers that can be set Unit No 7 To set and quit the menu press the WRT amp EXIT touch switch To quit without setting press Quit The run mode will be established 81 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC Host with Memory Switches Section 3 5 3 5 4 82 Setting RS 232C Communication Conditions NT20S ST128 When using an NT20S ST128 using the RS 232C interface for communication with the host set the following communication conditions e Data Bits e Stop Bits e Parity Check e Flow Control e Baud Rate Set the same com
245. o OFF 0 Checking the status of this flag will provide a simple method of checking if a number has been input from the NT20S Note that this function is not available with the character string memory table e PT status refer to page 196 The NT20S operation status and other information are written with the ON or OFF of the bits as shown below PT status notify bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Bit Word m 2 0 0 ojojo PT operation status 1 ON RUN 0 OFF STOP Screen switching strobe Numeral setting strobe flag Overview of Direct Connection Operations Section 5 1 Correct Use Reference The PT status control area PC to PT can be allocated to the following PC areas m foame O oann O ox rematar O imermaiSpeca ney O arme fr e feom ACI fom ANC HR relay O S AR poa ey O Aaa ey m tink ete o fp O OK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use Make sure there is no duplication in the PT status control area allocations and PT status notify area allocations When NT link 1 N is set the PT status control area must be set for each con nected PT 5 1 4 Switching the Screen Display Reference Word n The following describes the procedure used to switch the NT20S screen display by controlling from the PC The display screen can be
246. o the System Menu enabled disabled is set to OFF enabled If the setting is ON disabled the System Menu will not be dis played by following the procedure given below Displaying the System Menu Press appropriate touch switches to display the System Menu as mentioned be 70 low The RUN LED goes off when the System Menu is displayed The NT20S display screen has four touch switches to display the System Menu in the four corners about 8 mm x 8 mm size Press any two of these switches at the same time to call the System Menu screen RUN mode SYSTEM MENU Press any two of these four lt gt corners at the Maintenance mod same time Note that the touch switches used to call the System Menu are not displayed on the screen If a touch switch displayed in a corner is pressed first the touch switch will function and the System Menu will not be displayed To successfully call the System Menu first press a corner where no touch key is displayed and then press any other corner regardless of the presence of a touch key Ifa screen has the touch switches registered at all of the four corners it is impossi ble to call the System Menu from the screen A system key function can be assigned to a touch switch Pressing the touch switch so assigned on the screen can easily display the System Menu For the relationship between the system key and the touch switch refer to the System key functions page 139
247. ode control key switch Set this to host link 37 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 4 Setting the rear switches e I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C e Unit DIP SW1 Set SW1 1 to SW1 5 to OFF 0 1 0 port RS 422A RS 232C 536783 234 Synchronization Internal External 8 e Synchronization selector switch Set this to Internal Termination resistance 78 ON CTS ov External fa x e Baud rate DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps 0 OFF 1 0N A e 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to O 1 to N e Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled e CTS selection selector switch Set this always to OV ON 38 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 4 C500 C1000H C2000 H rack mounting type C500 LK203 Setting the rear switches e I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C e Unit parity and transfer code DIP SW1 1 to SW1 7 Set SW1 1 to SW1 7 to OFF 0 5V supply ON OFF 1 0 port RS 422A RS 232C Synchronization Internal External Termination resistance e Synchronization selector switch Set this to Internal ON CTS ov External e Baud rate DI
248. ommunication command control With NT20S ST121 V3 the host link NT link 1 1 and NT link 1 N communica tion methods are set with memory switches Other settings such as baud rate and automatic resetting of communication are also set with memory switches This section describes the communications condition settings by using the memory switches The NT20S has the memory areas used to store the PC connection method com munications conditions system settings etc which can be used as the switches and called the memory switches Since the memory switches use the flash memory the stored data can be held even when the power supply is turned OFF Setting Functions and the Memory Switch Menu MEMORY SW MENU 1 2 MEMORY SW MENU 2 2 The memory switches can be set easily by using the memory switch menu in the System Menu The following settings can be made with the memory switches Refer to the subse quent pages and Section 3 8 Various System Settings for the details of each set ting and function When using NT20S ST121 EV3 host link NT link Host link method Comm Type Host Link Automatic Reset No OFF Baud Rate 9600bps Buzzer Sound OFF None NT20M 75 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC Host with Memory Switches Section 3 5 NT Link method 1 1 MEMORY SW MENU 1 2 Comm Type NT Link Key S
249. on 198 In the example below the status of the NT20S is checked by PT status notify bit notification e Settings with the support tool Make the following setting with the support tool Allocated word for PT status notify area CHO110 e PC program Create the following PC ladder program 11215 MOV 21 0001 DMOo001 MOV 21 0002 DM0001 e Program operation 1 PT stopped Word that stores the PT status 2 PT running Word that stores the PT status 1 When the PT operating status contact 11215 is OFF 0 1 PT stopped is stored in DMO001 2 When the PT operating status contact 11215 is ON 1 2 PT running is stored in DMO001 SECTION 6 Using the RS 232C This section explains how to carry out communication via the RS 232C interface used with an NT20S ST128 focusing on the commands Table of Commands at A brennan aneurin deindub bi Boeck add 200 6 1 RS 232C Communications o 201 6 1 1 Communication Procedure 0 ccc eee cent e ene n eens 201 62122 1 PRECAUTIONS aaia a r deur dada 203 6 2 Sereen Display A E E 204 6 3 Memory Tables soa j scnap acot A eae es Salata ea certains 205 6 4 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting 0 0 eee cece ne eee 208 6 4 1 Notification and Control of Touch Switches 0 0 0c ccc eee nee 208 6 4 2 Notification of numeral setting input and touch switch status
250. ool Ver 4 _ NT V2 NT series support tool Ver 2 L Support Tool Direct Connection Communication Mode EOS Restrictions memory switch NTM V4 NT20M OMRON Standard NT20M wheel numeral settings not possible no upper lower limits tification fixed as momentary NT20S Ver 4 Standard High speed NT20S data transmission in screen units not possible NT20S_ Ver 5 Standard Highsspeed NT208 The NT20S cannot be used with combinations of support tools and settings other than those indicated above hexadecimal input not pos NT20M Ver 4 Standard NT20M sible indirect specification not possible touch switch input no NT V2 Reference The NT20S ST128 can be used in the same way with the NT series support tool Ver 2 _1 The neces sary support tool and Support Tool Mode NT20S memory switch settings in this case are as follows NT Model NT20S Direct setting No Communication mode Standard High speed Support Tool Mode NT20S 255 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host Appendix G APPENDIX G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host Explained below is the method for making the cable that connects the NT20S ST121 EV3 ST128 with the PC Connect the wires to the connectors in accordance with the connector specification for each unit Parts Required Two connectors two connector covers and one cable are required to make up a connecting
251. op the buzzer by using the screen operation create a h system key as a touch switch Select whether the numeric keys are automatically displayed or the numeric keys are created at arbitrary positions on the numeral setting screen The following two numeral setting attributes are used System The numeric keys registered to the system are automatically dis played User The numeric keys can be created at any arbitrary positions If the numeral setting attribute on the NT20S has been set for system the touch switches ENT 4 and Lt which are allocated to the system besides the numeric keys need to be created System key functions page 139 Bit input attributes applies to NT20S ST128 RS232C only Backlight attributes Select whether the touch switch number or bit information is notified to the host when the touch switch is pressed There are two types of bit input attribute in the screen attributes as indicated below e Off Bit control when a touch switch is pressed is invalid The status of the touch switch is notified using its number e Touch SW Bit control when a touch switch is pressed is valid The status of the touch switch is notified using bit information Select whether the backlight is lit or flashes when the screen is displayed There are two types of backlight attribute in the screen attributes as indicated below e Lit Backlight is lit when the screen is displayed e Flashing Backlight flashes
252. or Messages 0 e cece eee eee tence eee 237 7 2 1 Errors Occurring when the Power is Turned ON 1 eee eee 237 7 2 2 Errors Occurring During Operation 0 cece cee een eee 237 7 2 3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization 0 0 eee eee eee eee 237 7 2 4 Communication Errors 0 eee eee ence ene eae 237 7 3 Maintenance of the NT20S neait cece cette ene eens 239 7 4 Inspection and Cleaning 0 cee ccc cee eee eens 241 235 Hardware Faults Section 7 1 7 1 Hardware Faults When a fault relating to the operation of the NT20S occurs find the symptoms in the table below and respond by following the corresponding Remedy indicated in the table NT20S Symptons POWER LED fails to Power is not being supplied Check the connections and make sure that power is come ON supplied correctly Refer to 2 2 3 Power Supply Connection page 29 Power supply fuse has blown Contact your OMRON service center Nothing is displayed on Screen 0 has been read at the host This is not an error Change the screen number the screen itis side Refer to 4 3 Screen Display page 122 completely white Communication with the The Transmit Mode has not been Display the system menu and select the Transmit support tool not possible established Mode Refer to 3 6 Registering the Screen Data page 86 Not connected to the support tool Check the installation of the con
253. ords 1 word 47 words Elements occupying up to approximately 120 words calculated in this way can be registered If the number of elements is larger than this internal processing is in creased in proportion to the excess number and this generates a delay in proces sing If the point where the registrable quantity is exceeded is in the middle of an ele ment that spans several words for example a character string memory table reg istration is quit without registering that element e Order of priority for registration Elements are registered in the following order of priority according to their type 1 Allocated words of the PT status control area 2 Allocated bits for control lamps touch switches 3 Allocated words of numeral memory tables 4 Allocated words of character string memory tables If there is more than one element for each of 2 through 4 the elements are reg istered in accordance with the following priority of word and bit areas 1 Data memory DM 2 1 0 relays CH 3 Timers TIM 4 Counters CNT 5 Holding relays HR 6 Auxiliary relays AR Within each area words and bits are allocated from the smallest number up 253 NT20S Internal Processing Appendix E Event Processing When Using Direct Connection When the status of the NT20S changes during operation the processing for writing the changed data to the relevant area of the PC memory is executed This kind of processing
254. ort tool NT series Support Tool Ver 2 Support tool settings PT type NT20S Memory capacity 96 KB Direct setting Ver 5 Direct Macn Type OMRON 5 1 2 Allocatable Bits and Words When the host link NT link is used the following bits and words are allocated to the PC and used for the NT20S operation The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 278 The allocations must be made without exceeding respective area range OMRON PCs C Series PCs CVM1 CV Series PCs Symbol a g AlocatodWord Allocated Word Word N a AocatedWord Allocated Word Word ocate ocate Area N Area N mete PE en See tee OS ne ie CH Internal Special Internal Special Relay Relay e Rp fe pap ECON AI oom a Fa degree o poo Jara 0 0 0 fuer oo m Jump OO O OK A 1wordonly x NG When allocating a memory table to words the allocation must not exceed the word area Since the special auxiliary relays of the CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use However reading from them is possible 152 Overview of Direct Connection Operations Section 5 1 Reference One allocation word of the memory table can use continuous areas of up to 2 words in the case of numeral memory table or 16 words in the case of character string memory table 5 1 3 NT20S Status Control and Notification to PC The fol
255. ory Note If the NT20S is used for the first time or if the screen data is ruined and the NT20S cannot be normally started the memory needs to be initialized The memory initialization is required in the cases mentioned below e When the NT20S is used for the first time or when an error message indicating that the screen data is ruined etc when the NT20S is started Use the Maintenance Mode Init Memory in the System Menu e When the NT20S has made a buzzer sound and the screen has disappeared during the start up or operation Use the NT20S DIP SW2 1 Screen data forced initialize Yes No When an error has occurred the error messages such as Screen data corrupted will be displayed For the error messages displayed on the screen refer to Section 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages page 237 Initializing the screen data memory will erase entire screen data registered in the NT20S Make sure that there are backup copies of the screen data on floppy disks before starting the initialization e Data of the NT20S to be initialized Screen data System memory Memory table Mark data Direct information NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 Initialization by Using the System Menu Initialize the screen data memory by following the procedure given below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Initializing Memory
256. ot allocate momen tary touch switches and other types of touch switch to the same word since the notification operations are different In the case of 3 and 4 the notification operation has no influence on the other bits in the word e Possible bit allocations Notify bits and lamp bits for touch switches can be allocated to the areas of the PC memory listed in the following table Symbol C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated ECON Internal Special Relay Ea Internal Special Relay O m ering Reay PO AR Ronan Relay O Aaa m fme o fp O OK x NG Since all the CVM1 CV series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the system they cannot be used for applications not related to the system The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type See Appendix L PC Memory Map page 278 of the APPENDICES for more details When making a data memory DM specification specify the bit number 00 to 15 following the word number Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 5 3 5 34 Lit Flashing and Unlit Touch Switch Statuses Changing the Status of Allocated Bits This section describes how to change the statuses of allocated bits and thereby the statuses of the touch switches displayed by the NT20S The statuses of touch switches displayed by the NT20S are changed by switching the control bits allocated in the PC memory ON and OFF Allocated bit touch switch 1 so t
257. ouch switch is pressed the bit comes ON and remains ON even if the switch is pressed again Reset When the touch switch is pressed the bit goes OFF and remains OFF even if the switch is pressed again 181 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 5 3 182 e Notes on the Notification Operation The touch switch notification operations are as follows Type of Notification When Using Host Link or O E ae oe Operation NT Link with DM Area other than DM Area Momentary meros OFF units 3 Notification in bit units 2 Notification in word units Alternate however the word contents are read on display and noti 4 Notification in bit units fication is based on this reading When using touch switch input notification note the following points In the case of 1 the other bits in the same word as the notification bit are turned OFF by the notification operation In the case of 2 notification is executed on the basis of the contents of the word before display which means that the other bits are not rewritten Howev er ifthe word contents are changed at the PC side they will be rewritten based on the contents before display If the screen is switched while a momentary key is being pressed the touch switch itself disappears so the status OFF is notified In the case of 1 this means that the other bits in the word will also be turned OFF When using the host link or NT link with the DM area do n
258. ound OFF Buzzer Sound OFF Bk light Off None Tool Mode NT20M MEMORY SW MENU 2 2 Automatic Reset No NT Link method 1 N MEMORY SW MENU 1 2 Comm Type NT Link 1 N Key Sound OFF Buzzer Sound OFF Bk light Off None Tool Mode NT20M e Key Press Sound 3 8 Various System Settings page 91 MEMORY SW MENU 2 2 Automatic Reset No Unit No 7 e Buzzer Sound e Backlight Off e Comm Type e Baud Rate e Automatic Reset e Tool Mode 3 8 Various System Settings page 92 3 8 Various System Settings page 94 Selecting the Host Communication Method page 78 Selecting the Host Link Communication Speed page 79 Selecting the Automatic Reset Function page 84 3 8 Various System Settings page 95 NT20S ST122 V1 C200H Key Sound Buzzer Sound Bk light Off Comm Type Automatic Reset 76 Tool Mode e Key Press Sound e Buzzer Sound e Backlight Off e Comm Type e Automatic Reset e Tool Mode 3 8 Various System Settings page 91 3 8 Various System Settings page 92 3 8 Various System Settings page 94 Fixed as C200H Selecting the Automatic Reset Function page 84 3 8 Various System Settings page 95 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC Host with Memory Switche
259. overlapping screens can be displayed by designating the parent screen If a child screen is designated only the child screen is displayed For the continuous and overlapping screens refer to the Classification of Screens page 122 Example of Display Screen Switching This example operates the PC switch bit to switch the NT20S display screen e Support tool settings Make the following settings with the support tool PT status control area Word 0100 PT status notify area Word 0110 Screen number to be created Screen 2 and 3 e PC ladder program Create a PC ladder program as follows 00002 MOV 21 0002 100 00003 MOV 21 0003 100 11212 MOV 21 110 f 100 Screen switch strobe flag e Program operation 1 Screen number Screen switch setting word 2 Screen number Screen switch setting word 3 Screen number Screen switch setting word 1 Screen 2 is displayed on the NT20S when bit 00002 turns ON 2 Screen 3 is displayed on the NT20S when bit 00003 turns ON 3 When the screen switch strobe flag turns ON the number of the currently dis played screen is read and written to the currently displayed screen word in the PT status notify area In this case the NT20S will not write the same screen twice 159 Overview of Direct Connection Operations Section 5 1 5 1 5 Notifying the Display Screen to the PC To D
260. owing points e Be sure to switch the power OFF before replacement e After replacement check that the new NT20S is not subject to the same error e Ifafaulty unit is returned for repairs write as detailed a description of the fault as possible and send this description together with the unit tothe OMRON address indicated on the back cover of this book 242 Specifications Appendix A APPENDIX A Specifications General Specifications 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC 24 VDC 15 10 10 W max 0 to 50 C with no freezing 35 to 85 RH with no condensation Resistance to electrostatic discharge Level 3 IEC801 2 In air 8 kV contact 6 kV indirect 7 kV Electromagnetic field strength 10 V m IEC801 3 Fast transient burst noise Power supply line 2 kV IEC801 4 I O line 0 25 kV Damped oscillatory wave Power supply line 1 kV IEC255 4 Vibration resistance 10 to 22 Hz with 1 5 mm double amplitude for a total of 30 min in X Y and Z directions 22 to 500 Hz with 1 5 G 14 7 m s acceleration in X Y and Z directions Shock resistance Durability 30 G 3 times each in X Y and Z directions fee T Malfunction 20 G 3 times each in X Y and Z directions 190 W x 110 H x 58 D mm Enclosure ratings Front panel Equivalent to IP65 front face waterproof construction Rear case IP20 Terminals IPOO Applicable standards 1EC1131 2 1992 EN50081 2 1992 243 Specifications Appendix A Performance
261. passed through a hole or other opening the hole or opening must be at least 53 mm Removing the top cover reduces this requirement to 33 mmo or larger During installation this cover must be replaced before securing the PT 59 Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication Section 2 7 Connection to C200H C200HS and C200HX HG HE 60 Connect the CPU unit or I O extension unit with an I O cable The following restric tions apply when making this connection A maximum of one CPU unit and one I O extension unit can be connected Con nection to two I O extension units is not possible e Connection to a remote I O slave station is not possible e There is only one C200H interface unit interface connector This means that it is not possible to connect an NT20S between a CPU unit and an I O extension unit It must be the final connection in the system 1 0 connection cable C200H CN 1 O extension cable NT20M CNP 1 C200H CN 1 CPU unit 1 O extension unit Max 1 unit Rear face of NT20S Host interface connector Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication Section 2 7 Connection to C H Note
262. perating Status to the PC page 196 e Numeral memory table Numeral Memory Table page 127 e Character string memory table Character String Memory Table page 126 Common to All Communication Methods Press F4 Attrib in the Screen List screen to set the screen attributes in the Help Message The following attributes can be set e Buzzer None Cont Long Shrt e Bit In YES NO e Keypad Syst User e Backlight ON OFF Bit input attributes can be set when using the NT20S ST128 RS 232C Select a screen number and press Enter FIX DISPO NUM DISPO STR DISPm LAMP TOUCH SW gt SCRN LIST GRAPH IN SET EXTD I 00 H38 TBL EDIT REDISP OALARM OSTNOALONO EDIT OSET ENY MVWTND GUIDE Define lamp No 0001 Fr 80858Byte Create screen data in the Edit screen Data of one screen can be created by regis tering laying out the following display elements and attributes on the screen e Fix display Input character strings and figure Dad Characters and Figures Which can be Displayed page 119 e Numeral display Set numbers in the numeral memory table E E Numeral Memory Table page 127 115 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data Section 4 1 116 e Character string display Set the character string memory table number and display method as pida Character String Memory Table page 126
263. play is cleared to zero assuming decimal input Upper lower limit check When using an NT 20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 with Ver 5 direct connection when the return key is pressed after inputting a numerical value an upper lower limit check is executed If the input numerical value is outside the valid range the data inthe numeral memory table before input is redisplayed and not notified to the host 146 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 4 85 Using The Thumbwheel Type of Numeral Setting Ver 5 Direct Connection Only When using the thumbwheel type of numeral setting numerical values are input by directly touching the incrementing decrementing keys This type of input can only be used with Ver 5 of the direct connection function Numerical Value Input Input numerical values by using the incrementing decrementing keys pro vided for each digit Numerical value specification When an incrementing decrementing key is touched the numeral at the corresponding digit is incremented or decremented by one Whenever a plus or minus key is touched the changed value is notified to the host There is no need to press the return key as is the case when using the numeric key type of numer al setting Thumbwheel numeral setting Numeral 340 Etc memory table Hae 1234 DAG Press Aa A BH Bl 22342 host E q
264. play position and size length of a bar graph can be set The width of the bar graph can be set in the range of 2 to 255 dots 129 Bar Graphs Section 4 5 e Orientation and incremental direction The orientation and incremental direction of the bar graph can be selected from those mentioned below up The bar graph increments upward in the vertical orientation y down The bar graph increments downward in the vertical orientation lt left The bar graph increments to the left in the horizontal orientation right The bar graph increments to the right in the horizontal orientation Direction 1 Direction gt Graph frame Select whether or not the graph frame boundary line of a graph display area which indicates the effective display range is displayed lt This frame is not displayed if Graph frame No has been set Setting the 100 value and display Set a value which corresponds to 100 for the 100 value The available value range is O to 99999999 max eight digits For the display whether or not the proportion percentage of the reference numeral memory table value to the 100 value is displayed in a numeral can be selected The display value is calculated as follows display value Numeral memory table value 100 value x 100 For the font and attributes used for the numeral display refer to Num
265. port Software W249 E1 Operation Manual CVMQ PCs Host link Unit SYSMAC C Series Host Link Unit System Manual W143 E1 SYSMAC CVM1 CV Series Host Link System Operation Manual W205 E1 20 SECTION 2 Hardware Settings and Connections This section describes the settings of the NT20S connections to a Host and other hardware settings 2 1 Description of Parts and Settings o o ooocoooconoronoronorono re 22 211 Description Parts ic a it gud t 22 2 1 2 Operation Status DIP Switch Settings 0 eee ee eee eee 24 2 1 3 Setting the Communication Condition Setting Switches NT20S ST122 V1 Only 25 222 Imstallai rs it ant gis a ed pts 27 2 2 1 Installation Environment 0 0 eee ccc eee cence tenes 27 2 2 2 Installation to the Operation Panel 0 0c eee eee eee 28 2 2 3 Power Supply Connection a a phe sete 4G glk Slane gens 29 2 3 Connecting to the Support Tool ssrt ior us e ea cece eens 31 2 4 Connection to a PC by the Host Link 0 ce eee een eee 32 2 421 Compatible PES to ghia Sarena pie sole OTE DT Bhi ete dai als 32 2 4 2 Connecting the NT208 cuco eo e ae eh A ee SI see 34 2 4 3 PC Switch Settings asc kee Ge ee ee eh sbi ia ae ha se ea i 36 2 5 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 0 cece eee 45 225 1 Compatible PCS cisco We be ete See Wath Gd A Weve ee wee 45 2 5 2 Connecting the NT208 csc hia eek
266. press touch switches after confirming system safety Correct Use Continuous display of the same pattern for an extended time as a guide about 1 hour will lead to the formation of an afterimage In order to prevent this either use the screen saver function or periodically switch screens 3 8 4 Support Tool Mode Setting NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 Only By setting Tool Mode to NT20MW the NT20M ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 can be used in the same way as the conventional NT20M and it becomes possible to use the NT20M NT2000M NT600M support tool Ver 4 However the following restrictions apply when NT20M is set e Ver 5 of the direct connection function cannot be used e The PT type setting must be NT20M e High speed data transfer with the support tool is not possible e It is not possible to transfer the direct information alone e When screen data transmission is in screen units simultaneous transmission of multiple screens is not possible An attempt to transmit multiple screens may destroy the screen data e When screen data transmission is in screen units transmission with verification set is not possible e The image data memory must be initialized before starting transfer in file units e Screen data for RS 232C communication cannot be used 95 Various System Settings Section 3 8 96 Set the support tool mode by the menu operation from the system menu shown below Select
267. r process NT205 Direct Mum Mem Tab ls Str Mem Tabl s DAC fune 0 OOK il Copy WeletesPrint MloolS Hi st 8 Tm Y Rov gin Sorki itle G Next Help Message m rr E T z com ES Sod pat Uca i co mej HE Y I P P 5 I Pl P Pl ava eas Soon Pressing the F8 Start up screen key allows setting of the screen number to be displayed when the NT20S is booted Only effective when using RS 232C Transmitting Screen Data to the NT20S Transmit the screen data created by using the support tool to the NT20S screen data memory Pressing the F6 Tmx key onthe File List screen will cause the created screen data to be transmitted to the NT20S in file units Pressing F10 Next and then F6 Tmx on the File List screen will cause the screen data to be transmitted in screen units Before attempting data transmission connect the NT20S and sup port tool and set the NT20S to the transmit mode For the connection procedure to the support tool refer to Section 2 3 Connecting to the Support Tool page 31 For the transmission of the screen data refer to Section 3 6 Registering the Screen Data page 86 Note When transmitting data in screen units if changes have been made to memory tables or direct information in addition to the screens transmit this changed data also 117 Outline of Functions Section 4 2 4 2 Outline of Functions 4
268. ration 1 Set DIP SW2 1 on the NT20S to ON and turn the power ON or reset the NT20S Select Yes The screen data memory is ini tialized During the initialization the Initializing message will be displayed Initialize Screen Memory Initialized the Screen Data Memory Turn OFF the DIP Switch 2 1 and push the Reset Switch then return to RUN mode 2 Turn the NT20S power to OFF 3 Set NT20S DIP SW2 1 to OFF and turn the power ON Reference Selecting No will cancel the memory initialization In either case when chang ing the system settings or registering screen data display the system menu after setting DIP switch SW2 1 to the OFF position while the NT20S power is OFF then switching the power back ON e TheNT20S DIP SW2 1 is used to set Screen data forced initialize Yes No Set ting this to Yes selects effective and No ineffective 74 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC Host with Memory Switches Section 3 5 3 5 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches Memory Switches The communications between the NT20S and a PC Host are called the host com munications The NT20S models can be connected to the host using the following communica tion methods NT20S ST121 EV3 Host link or NT link both direct connection NT20S ST122 V1 C200H direct communication direct connection NT20S ST128 RS 232C c
269. ration environment 3 8 1 Setting the Key Press Sound Whether or not the key press sound is given when the NT20S touch switch is pressed can be set with the memory switch The factory setting has been set to give the key press sound when the touch key is pressed Set the key press sound by the menu operation from the System Menu as men tioned below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Each time the Key Sound MEMORY SW MENU 1 2 touch switch is pressed the set Comm Type Host Link ting option ON alternates with OFF Key Sound OFF The figure to the left shows the Buzzer Sound OFF NT20S ST121 EV3 screen Bk light Off None Tool Mode NT20M 91 Various System Settings Section 3 8 3 8 2 To set and quit the menu press the WRT 4 EXIT touch switch To quit without setting press Quit e ON The key press sound will be given for 0 2 second when a touch switch is pressed e OFF The key press sound will not be given when a touch key is pressed Using the Buzzer Setting the Buzzer To Stop the Buzzer Sound 92 Reference The NT20S can set a buzzer to indicate the occurrence of an
270. rd DMO110 155 Overview of Direct Connection Operations Section 5 1 Notifying the NT20S Status by Using Allocated Bits and Words PT Status Notify Area PT to PC 156 The PT status notify area PT to PC is provided to notify the NT20S status changes to the PC When any NT20S status has changed such change is written to this area in the PC and the PC will read the data from this area to check the NT20S status The PT status notify area is configured as three consecutive words as shown be low Word 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit i MN Screen 4 digit BCD Screen being displayed mt 0 08 The first word word m of the PT status notify area must be set with the support tool e Currently displayed screen refer to page 160 The screen number displayed on the NT20S is written to this word Simultaneously the PT status screen switch strobe flag is set to ON 1 After this is notified to the PC this flag reverts to OFF 0 Checking the status of this flag will provide a simple method of checking if the NT20S display has switched e Content upgrade memory table refer to page 188 The number of the numeral memory table is written to the word when the numer al memory table contents change due to the touch switch operation on the NT20S As the number of the numeral table is written the PT status numeral setting strobe flag is simultaneously set ON 1 After this is notified to the PC this flag reverts t
271. reen data for the NT20S in the File List screen To create a new file select New File To edit an existing file select a file to edit Select New File and press Enter Enter filename on completion of creation 4 Select Screen Creation NEW_FILE Ser list NT20S Y4 96KB Screen Selection No Status Comment Pabn Paue Help Message Tab lSpecified Page Seace Mark Unmark HonelUnmark ALL alma rklUnmark All Esc Select File Hist Pepe pe ppp 1 i 3 4 5 6 1 3 g 0 1 2 3 4 5 16 l Copy BeletasPrint Batt ri bla Read Br ommntgpete Eo Ov IRS Mark i Next Select a screen number to edit in the selected file in the Screen List screen Note that when using the host link NT link or C200H direct communication the PT status control area and PT status notify area must be set as described below be fore selecting the screen number To read the screen data from other file press the F5 Read function key 114 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data Section 4 1 Host link NT link C200H direct communication Press F10 Next in the Screen List screen then press F2 Direct to dis play the Direct Conn Setting screen On this screen specify the first words allocated to the following areas in the PC memory e PT status control area Section 5 4 NT20S Status Control page 191 e PT status notify area Section 5 5 Notification of the O
272. returns to the unlit status when re leased When atouch switch which is currently lit or flashing is pressed it is continuously lit while pressed and returns to its original state when released Simultaneous pressing of multiple touch switches Two or more touch switches can be simultaneously pressed if their statuses are notified by bit information or if they use different host notification methods Howev er two or more switches cannot be simultaneously pressed if their statuses are notified to the host by their numbers 209 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 6 4 Lamp and Touch Switch Display Bit Specification Format Example Description ESC K m0 m02 mi mio m2 m2 gt m3 m32 CR m0 to m3 Specification of lamps and touch switches 2 digit hexadecimal The relationship between the lamp and touch switch number and an expression of mO to m3 in bits is given in the following table mx1 Higher 4 bits of mx x O to 3 mx2 Lower 4 bits of mx Bit ON The lamp or touch switch is turned on or caused to flash Bit OFF The lamp or touch switch is turned off To turn on lamps and touch switches with the numbers 1 5 6 7 and 26 m0 m0 m1 1 m1 2m2y m2 m3 m3 gt E200004 e Changes the display status of the lamps or touch switches e Whether the lamp or touch switch which corresponds to the specified bit is turned on or flashes is determined by the set
273. s Section 3 5 NT20S ST128 RS 232C Key Press Sound ON Data Bits 8bits Buzzer Sound ON Stop Bits 1bit Bk light Off 10min Parity Check Even Automatic Reset Yes Flow Control RS CS Baud Rate 19200bps LMP Bit Control Enable e Key Press Sound 3 8 Various System Settings page 91 e Buzzer Sound 3 8 Various System Settings page 92 e Backlight Off 3 8 Various System Settings page 94 e Automatic Reset Selecting the Automatic Reset Function page 84 e Data Bits Setting RS 232C Communication Conditions page 82 e Stop Bits Setting RS 232C Communication Conditions page 82 e Parity Check Setting RS 232C Communication Conditions page 82 e Flow Control Setting RS 232C Communication Conditions page 82 e Baud Rate Setting RS 232C Communication Conditions page 82 e LMP Bit Control 3 8 Various System Settings page 97 77 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC Host with Memory Switches Section 3 5 3 5 1 78 Selecting the Host Communication Method NT20S ST121 EV3 only The NT20S ST121 EV3 can be connected to a PC by the host link or the NT link Either link can be selected by settingthe Comm Type memory switch Thefacto ry setting has been made to the Host link Select the host commu nication method by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below
274. see ae Oh ee ee ea i 46 229 3 5 PCSwitch Settings did tia Sop miki tale rd a Sendak aaa 47 2 6 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N 0 eee ce eee 49 2 6 1 Compatible PES count sai yeaa eee ea wi Caney edad ey eee 49 2 6 2 Connecting the NT20S Units s i sseni eie aots poai cc cnet tenes 49 2263 POS Witch Settings cit bee E E EEE piace ioe tds Moen 57 2 7 Communicating with the PC Using C200H Direct Communication 58 2 7 1 Applicable PO UMIS arra piira a Blase NEERA ENA 58 2 7 2 Connection Method sizs sie 4 heb nn e EEE EN aoe I EEE Soe 59 2 7 3 Switching the Power ON OFF When Using C200H Direct Communication 62 2 8 Host Connections by RS 232C 2 0 eee eee teen ene ene 63 2 8 1 Host Computer Communication Settings 0 0 0 eee ee eee eee 63 2 8 2 Connector Pin Arrangement 0 eee ec ee eee teen eae 63 21 Description of Parts and Settings Section 2 1 2 1 Description of Parts and Settings Before getting to the operation confirm the names and functions of parts Also set the DIP switches on the NT20S 2 1 1 Description of Parts Front View POWER LED Lit when the power is supplied RUN LED Display Lit when the unit is in An STN LCD screen with a backlight The RUN mode whole area of the screen is a touch panel which works as an input device Reference The NT20S comes in two body colors e NT20S ST12L beige e NT20S ST12L 1B black
275. shielded cable HITACHI Cable Ltd 268 Connecting to an RS 232C RS 422A Converter Unit 1 1 Appendix APPENDIX Connecting to an RS 232C RS 422A Converter Unit 1 1 By using an RS 232C RS 422A converter unit NT ALO01 RS 232C can be converted to RS 422A allowing long distance communication of up to 500 m Connection Method RS 232C cable max 2 m RS 232C RS 422A converter unit RS 422A cable type NT ALOO1 max 500 m RS 232C RS 422A converter unit RS 232C cable type NT AL001 max 2 m Wiring e Wiring of RS 232C cable PTorPC NT AL001 Abbrev Pin No Pin No Abbrev Connector cover Connector cover SD 2 2 SD RS 232C RD 3 3 RD RS 232C interface interface RS 4 4 RS CS 5 5 CS 5V 6 6 5V SG 9 9 SG The pin numbers are the numbers at the NT20S Shielding Only connected at PC For the pin numbers at the PC refer to the manual wire for the PC used 269 Connecting to an RS 232C RS 422A Converter Unit 1 1 Appendix e RS 422A Cable Wiring NT ALOO1 NT ALOO1 Abbrev Pin No a Pin No Abbrev FG 1 1 FG RS 422A SDA 3 3 SDA RS 422A terminal terminal block SDB 4 4 SDB block RDA 5 5 RDA RDB 6 6 RDB Shielding wire DIP Switch Settings at RS 232C RS 422A Converter Unit
276. sitions per screen displays Numeral displays 50 positions per screen 8 digit display Graph displays 50 per screen Graphic displays Can be displayed wherever required 128 per screen Max 256 strings per file Touch switches Max 256 strings per file Numeral settings Display of set numerical values 50 per screen Screen types Normal screen Displays screens registered as normal Overlapping screens A maximum of 8 registered screens can be displayed overlapped with each other Continuous screens A maximum of 8 screens can be displayed sequentially by scrolling The screen can be changed by pressing the and touch switches Screen attributes Buzzer numeral setting Screen registration method Transfer screen data created using the support tool to the PT Screen saving method Saved to flash memory recording format unique to NT20S screen data memory Number of numeral memory tables that can be set number used for numeral display number used for graphs number used for numeral settings 128 Display Element Specifications Display characters Half size characters 8 x 8 dots Alphanumerics and symbols Normal characters 8 x 16 dots Alphanumerics and symbols Marks 16 x 16 dots User defined pictographs Enlargement function Horizontal and vertical magnifications of double width double height 4x 9x and 16x Smoothing processing Enlarged characters up to 4x Character display attributes Normal invers
277. status O 30 4 Buzzer off 1 311 Continuous buzzer 2 32 4 Short intermittent buzzer Description Controls the NT20S buzzer Reference The buzzer turned on with this command can be stopped with a Buzzer control command press the buzzer stop touch switch on the screen or by displaying a screen with no buzzer attributes System Menu Display Permission Format ESC w m4 1B 57 E E my System menu display permission inhibition 0 301 Display permitted 1 314 Display inhibited 215 Terminal Commands Section 6 6 Description System menu is displayed when display permitted is set and from the system menu selection of transmit mode or maintenance mode is possible If display inhibited is set the system menu is not displayed Turning off the power or resetting operation validates the settings made with the DIP switch SW2 3 on the NT20S 6 6 Terminal Commands Clear Screen Format Description Reference 216 This section describes the terminal commands used to display character strings or graphics in accordance with instructions from the host independently of the screens registered in the NT20S Terminal commands designate screen attributes such as inversion flashing cur sor position and size of characters before the characters are displayed Once screen attributes are set they remain effective for screen displays until they are cancelled or other attributes are
278. t sign clear CLR and return e When inputting a numerical value that includes a decimal point input the inte ger and decimal fraction separately First inputthe integer then press the deci mal point key and input the decimal fraction Ifthe integer or decimal fraction exceed their respective allowable numbers of display digits they are shifted tothe left Inthe system keys however the dec imal point key is not included Therefore it is necessary to create the deci mal point key apart from the ten keys of the system keys to input a numerical value including decimal fraction e Changing the sign When there is a sign display pressing the sign key changes minus to plus or plus to minus e Confirming input numerical values Always press the return key as the final step when inputting a numerical value When the return key is pressed the displayed numerical value is written to the numeral memory table and at the same time notified to the host Initial operation of input keys The sign key decimal point key and alphabet key A to F operate as follows on initial use first use after displaying the screen Sign key The display is cleared to zero assuming decimal input with sign display Decimal point key The display is cleared to zero after which input starts from the decimal fraction digits assuming decimal input with sign display Alphabet A to F key The dis
279. t No 65 the factory settings of the DIP switches do not agree with the factory settings for the PC system settings e The factory settings for the DIP switches are 2400 bps 1 stop bit even parity 7 bit data length e The factory settings for the PC system settings are 9600 bps 2 stop bits even parity 7 bit data length For CPU units manufactured from July 1995 lot No LJL175 onward the factory settings for the DIP switches are also 9600 bps and 2 stop bits 1 0 port selector switch RS 232C RS 422A 42 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 4 Making the PC system settings The possible settings and existing settings which can be set by the PC system set ting are as given below Item Possible Setting Existing Setting Baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps 9600 bps Stop bit 1 or 2 stop bits 2 stop bits Parity Even odd non parity Even parity Data length ASCII 7 bits or JIS 8 bits ASCII 7 bits Unit 00 to 31 Unit 00 e C series C200HS C200HX HG HE CPM1 CQM1 Set the operating conditions to the PC system setting area when a C200HS C200HX HG HE CPM1 or CQM1 CPU is connected to the NT20S The PC sys tem setting area data memory can be directly accessed from the peripheral tool LSS etc The following describes the switch settings so as to enable the PC system set tings For the details of the operation with the PC system setting are
280. ta is created by using the support tool The support tool registers the screen data used with one NT20S to one file Screen data can be created by one of the following three methods e creating a new file e editing an existing file e reading and editing selected screens from an existing file Screen Data Creation Procedure The following gives the basic screen data creation procedure Required settings and reference pages are given for each step of the procedure NT series Support Tool Yersion 2 0 Edit Screen Tool Settings Exit C OMRON Corporation 1995 All Rights Reserved Select Tool Settings in the Main Menu to display the Tool Settings screen Settings of PT setting memory size and direct setting are made in this screen Refer to Setting the support tool for use with the NT20S on the previous page 113 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data Section 4 1 4 Select Tool Settings File List NT20S V4 J6KB File Selection FileName Title 1 10 Fabel Paup El FILE Creation of New File or Line Input rocess control backup EsclExit to Main Menu roduction Qty Check or Line Input A rocess control backup ROC_C roduction Qty Check PROC_CTL o process Help Message NT20S Di rect Num Mem Tabl s Str Mem Tabls func il Copy WeletesPrint MloolS MBH ist 8 Im Y Rov Bin Scrii tle E Next Select a file used for storing the sc
281. tails on screen numbers see 4 3 Screen Display page 122 Confirming the Communications between the NT20S and the PC Host 90 When using the NT20S ST128 use the RS 232C communication check function in the Maintenance Mode to confirm normal communication between the NT20S and the host Refer to Checking the Communications with the Host on page 102 When using the NT20 ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 run the Host program and check that the following operations are executed normally e Confirm that the NT20S screens switch according to the Host program execu tion If the screens do not switch correctly check the connection between the NT20S and the Host and also check the settings Refer to Section 2 Hardware Settings and Connections e Confirm that the information selected by the NT20S touch switches has been correctly sent to the PC by displaying the information of bits and words by usinga peripheral tool LSS etc If the information sent from the NT20S has not been correctly received by the PC check the screen data settings specifically the switch settings For the details of the screen data creation refer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 L Various System Settings Section 3 8 3 8 Various System Settings The NT20S can set a variety of functions to the memory switches which are conve nient during the operation This section describes the memory switch settings re lated to the ope
282. tenance Section 3 9 Checking the LED Check the LED by using the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select I O Check MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Select LED Check 1 0 CHECK MENU Quit _ LCD Display LED Check Comm Check Buzzer Touch Switch Data Memory The RUN LED on the front face of the NT20S will flash The POWER LED re mains lit e To quit the LED check press the EXIT touch switch The NT20S will enter the 1 0 CHECK MENU 105 System Maintenance Section 3 9 Checking the Screen Memory 106 Reference Check the screen memory by using the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below When the screen data memory is checked the memory is initialized and all the screen data is lost Check that the screen data has been backed up using the sup port tool before executing a screen data memory check Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select I O Check MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Select
283. th 7 bits Stop bit 2 bits Parity Even Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female Communications protocol C series SYSWAY 1 N For an NT Link 1 to 1 NT20S ST121 EV3 9 pin D SUB connector female For an NT Link 1 N NT20S ST121 EV3 EIA AS23020 Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female Transmission distance e RS 232C cable Max 2 m e RS 422A 485 cable Total length 500 m Number of units connected 1 1to8 When NT ALOO1 used 246 Specifications Appendix A For RS 232C NT20S ST128 Communication settings Start stop synchronization Baud rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Data length 7 8 bits Stop bit 1 2 bits Parity Even Odd None Flow control RS CS control XON XOFF control None Connector 9 pin D SUB female Number of units connected 247 Appendix B Dimensions APPENDIX B Dimensions Outside Dimensions 178 7 00 O POWER O RUN 100 3 93 PA _ _ EEN 4 5 0 17 190 7 48 58 2 28 Dimensions for Installation Unit mm in 7 T lt D Installation fitting 15 5 0 61 Installation 34 1 34 140 5 51 panel min 38 1 5 max l i Unit mm in 248 Handling the RS 232C RS 422 Converter Unit Appendix C APPENDIX C Handling the RS 232C RS 422A Converter Unit This section shows the dimensions of the RS 232C RS 422A
284. the SYSMAC C200HX HG HE Installation Guide W302 E1 L Connecting to C Series CPM1 The CPM1 is connected via an RS 232C adapter type CPM1 CIFO1 Procure an RS 232C 9 pin type connection cable for the connection When a Connection Cable Longer Than 5 m is Required When a connection cable longer than 5 m is required it must be specially made However note that the maximum transmission distance is 15 m For details onthe method for making the connection cable refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host page 256 35 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 4 When Long Distance Transmission is Required 2 4 3 36 When transmission over a distance exceeding the RS 232C specification is re quired it can be achieved by using an RS 232C RS 422A converter unit type NT AL001 to switch to RS 422A communication RS 485 communication cannot be used For details refer to Connecting to an RS 232C RS 422A Converter Unit 1 1 page 269 PC Switch Settings Note When the NT20S and PC are connected to each other set the conditions at the PC host link unit or the CPU as given in the table below The following is a general description of switch settings Refer to the manual for respective units for the details of the switch settings Set the same baud rate as the NT20S 1 TONTA TAM CA 1 Set the host link baud rate at 9600 bps or 19200 bps w
285. the host via an RS 232C interface characters and graphics can be displayed independently of the regis tered screens Terminal function NT20S ST128 ST168 Functions of NT20S Section 1 2 1 23 Comparison between NT20S and NT20M The NT20S is a unitary PT which incorporates a system ROM screen memory and a host I F unit Host link NT link RS 232C and C200H direct communication as the standard equipment in one body The NT20S has the following features which are different from those of existing NT20M Communication e Host link NT link incorporated Host I F units are required NT20S ST121 EV3 e C200H direct communication incorporated NT20S ST122 V1 e RS 232C incorporated NT20S ST128 other host I F units cannot be connected Communication connector The communication connector 9 pin fora The support tool connector 9 pin is located Host is shared with that for a support tool on the front side The Host connector 25 pin NT20S ST121 EV3 ST1 28 is located on the back side e Connectors for support tool 9 pin and Host connections on the rear face NT20S ST122 V1 Alarm output terminal Allowable momentary Not guaranteed 5 msec power interruption time System ROM Built in not replaceable System ROM compatible with host I F unit is required Not provided History retaining function Not provided Screen transfer Only possible if screen data memory is an SRAM Backlight replacement O Poss
286. the operation functions system configuration and the direct connection function of the NT20S Section 2 describes the NT20S hardware settings its installation in an operation panel its connection to the Host etc Section 3 describes the procedure before operating the NT20S and useful functions when operating it Also describes how to perform an operation check Section 4 describes the functions of the NT20S when it is connected to a Host Section 5 describes how to operate the NT20S when the host link NT link is used for communication Read this chapter only when using the NT20S ST121 1 ST161 ST122 Section 6 describes how to operate the NT20S when the RS 232C interface is used for communication Read this chapter only when using the NT205 ST128L ST168 Section 7 describes the procedures to follow when the system does not operate correctly and the proce dure for routine maintenance of the NT20S APPENDIX describes the specifications and the method for making connecting cables and includes an area list for the PC xi Related Manuals and Their Contents The related manuals are indicated below The L symbol at the end of the manual number is the revision history symbol Operating the programmable terminal and communicating with the host e NT20S Programmable Terminal Operation Manual V020 E1 L A TA AE saa Chanel This manual This operation manual is th
287. the procedure to write numeral values to the allocated words of the numeral memory tables refer to Displaying the Contents of Allocated Words of Memory Tables page 167 For the procedure to change the contents of the numeral memory table PC words refer to Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words page 169 e Available allocation words The numeral memory tables can be allocated to the following PC areas pm Batawemoy O pamen 07 or fienaSpeca Relay O remap n 0 a NV EAS NC font fome J a fom 27 HR rola O pp AR Ronan Relay O Aaa m fwn o fp O OK A 1wordonly x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 278 177 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 5 3 5 3 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting 5 3 1 Allocation Bits and Display of Lamps Lamps are controlled by allocating them to the PC bits Set the area and bit num ber e Available allocation bits The lamps can be allocated to the following PC areas Symbol C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Internal Special Relay O Internal Special Relay O m remar O pp AR roy Relay O aaa rR fwe O fo O OK x NG Since th
288. ting made using the support tool e This command can be used only when the setting for the LMP Bit Control memory switch is Enable Lamp and Touch Switch Display Number Specification Format 210 ESC Q m4 ny n2 m4 Display status O 30 4 Not lit normal display 1 814 Lit 2 321 Flashing inverse 3 33 All not lit n n Lamp or touch switch 2 digit hexadecimal 000 to FFy 0 to 255 Lamps Touch Switches Numeral Setting Section 6 4 Description Changes the lamp or touch switch lighting status Specify the display status as 3 all not lit to turn off all the lamps and touch switches In this case specify the lamp or touch switch number to any number in the permitted range A Caution The display attributes set with the Support Tool determine if lamps 0 to 31 light continuously or flash The display status set with this command is ignored Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Enquiry Format ESC R ny n2 1B 52 Eo a nynz Lamp or touch switch 2 digit hexadecimal 000 to FFy 0 to 255 Description Enquires the status of a lamp or touch switch specified by its address The NT20S returns the Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Response Com mand refer to 6 4 7 Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Response to report the display status Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Response Format ESC S m4 ny n2
289. tings ooooo 36 47 PC system setting 41 42 43 47 POWER taa Shana 105 POWER LED ee iccs seen aeiaai ieai ngn zas 236 PP i228 da as 2 271 PT operating status o oooooooommo o 196 PTSD diari E E 113 PESAS BNA e de dl 196 PT status control area 17 154 191 PT status notify area 17 156 Page number display o 123 Panel siii ed ail site 2 Panel fittings 0 ccc cece eee ee 28 Parent Screen eana e a ee ee 122 123 ParItyiCNECK coooes pecan ic rez es 83 A acetate Sad We each sess 130 Yo NAIUGS aaa aa eee ble wakes 131 Peripheral tool 41 42 43 47 Power input terminals 23 29 Power to the computer is interrupted 89 Programmable terminal oo oo 2 FSV DUPULT cos Learned 64 Q QQ command coocccccccccc 237 R RS 232C 422A converter unit 262 RS 232G Fita lidia 102 RS 232C cable 0 cece eee 31 RS CS a duty es neice Se hae enh 83 RUN a tios 105 RUN LED oir a a hian a E Aia ee 236 Reflection suppressing protective sheet 276 Related manuals and their contents xi Replaceable backlight 276 Replacing the backlight 240 Request screen number 5 204 Reset isos a 89 181 Reset swile eo vies ai bie et adil aie es 23 eV Sinama eee eae tee eee 134 Reverse and flash
290. tion 4 8 4 8 2 Types of Numeral Setting Numeric Key Type There are two types of numeral setting the numeric key type and the thumbwheel type The basic function of these two types is the same but the screen displays and in put methods are different A maximum of 50 input fields including both numeric key and thumbwheel types can be registered on one screen The thumbwheel type of numeral setting can only be used when using Ver 5 direct connection with an NT20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 When a numerical value is input using touch switches to which numeric key func tions have been allocated the input numerical value is displayed on the screen On pressing the return key after completing input the input numerical value is writ ten to the numeral memory table and notified to the host If there is more than one numeral setting input field the field in which the input is to be made can also be selected with the numeric keys In order to perform numeric key input it is necessary not only to create a numeral setting input field on the screen but also to create the numeric keys to be used for input see page 143 Displayed in the numeral NT20S setting input field NES Write Notification A Numeral Input memory table On pressing the 1 key the input value is written to the numeral memory table and simultaneously notified to the PC Input the numerical value using the numeric keys on the screen Th
291. tion cable always secure it with the screws Otherwise the cably may disconnect causing operation to fail e The cable s tensile load is 30 N Do not subject it to loads greater than this Otherwise a discontinuity may occur causing operation to fail When connecting the C200HX HG HE and an RS 232C RS 422A converter unit use a converter unit whose lot number is 15Y5 or later Converter units of lot num bers previous to 15Y5 cannot be connected 49 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 6 Connection Diagram As shown in the figure below connect multiple NT20S units to one PC In an NT link 1 N up to eight NT20S units can be connected to one PC port C200HX HG HE OMRON PC While controlling machinery and monitoring lines controls the NT20S units when necessary C200HX HG HE can be used RS 232C cable max length 2 m or directly connected RS 232C RS 422A RS 232C RS 422A RS 422A 485 cable converter unit converter unit type NT ALO01 type NT ALO01 RS 422A 485 cable Total cable length 500 m RS 232C RS 422A converter unit type NT AL001 Not required if the connection is RS 232C cable RS 232C cable made at the RS 422A 485 port max length 2 m max length 2 m Up to eight NT20S units can be connected Maximum Number of NT20Ss Connectable to One Port The maximum numbers of NT20S units that can be connected to one port of each of the C200HX
292. touch switch numbers 227 to 230 and 255 as shown below When atouch switch with one ofthese numbers is displayed as the corresponding system key Touch Switch No on the screen it has the same function System Key Key Symbol System menu display MENU Buzzer stop el 227 228 229 230 255 When a touch switch to which a system key function has been allocated is pressed the touch switch bit information is not notified to the PC The el t and H keys are not displayed among the system numeric keys Ac cordingly when using the system numeric keys create the ld 4 and 4 keys Alternatively create user numeric keys 139 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 4 8 Numeral Setting N Caution The NT20S has a numeral setting function to enable numerical values to be input from the screen This function inputs numerical values to numeral memory tables in response to touch switch operations displays these numerical values on the screen and sends them to the host This section outlines the numeral setting function and the method for creating the ten keys required to set numerical values on the screen and explains how to use ten keys during operation Numeral setting screens cannot be registered as child screens of continuous screens Inthe case of overlapping screens only one of the screens can be setas a numeral setting screen For details of the actual methods used to ascertain input n
293. transmit the screen data again ote 1 There is no screen data Transmit screen data from the support tool 7 2 2 Errors Occurring During Operation The table below shows the errors that can occur during operation of the NT20S and their remedies Setting Error Bits or words allocated to the PC Check the memory area in the PC used and correct memory cannot be found in the the bit and word allocations in the screen data screen data QQ command is not The PC cannot be connected to the Select a type of PC that can be connected to the available NT20S NT20S 7 2 3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization The table below shows the errors that can occur when data is written to the NT20S screen data memory and their remedies Initialization Error Hardware fault or screen data If the same message is displayed even after executing memory life reached screen data memory initialization or screen data transmission several times contact your OMRON service center 7 2 4 Communication Errors This section describes the errors relating to communication with the PC Host that can occur during operation and their remedies e Operation when a communication error occurs When a communication error occurs the error message is displayed at the NT208S and the buzzer sounds Error messages are displayed when the Auto matic Reset memory switch is not set 237 Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 Some
294. tto send TO pe Reauestto sena Te pH a sa as 9 la Sendata SS 5 Receive data de E8c A EEN 262 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host Appendix G Wiring method NT AL001 NT20S RS 232C l RS 422A HOST Abbrevi Pin No Pin No Abbrevi mpbrewt Terminal Signal bame 1 1 FG FG 1 Frame ground SD 2 2 SD SG 2 Signal ground RD 3 n 3 RD SDB 3 Receive data ineas RS 232C RS 232C RS 422A i F interface RS 4 Sa BS interface interface ene RETO 5V 6 6 5V RDA 6 Send data 7 7 DSR CSB 7 8 8 ER CSA 8 SG 9 9 SG Terminal block 9 pin 9 pin 263 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the Host Appendix G Preparing RS 232C Connector Cables Prepare a connector cable to connect a NT20S to a Host separated by more than 5 m so that the standard connector cable cannot be used The maximum cable length is 15 m Recommended Parts MI TI o o SSS Connector XM2A 0901 9 pin manufactured by OMRON NT20S Connector cover XM2S 0911 9 pin manufactured by OMRON NT20S Cable AWG28X5P Multicore cable manufactured by Fujikura Ltd IFVV SB CO MA VV SB Multicore cable manufactured by Hitachi Cable Ltd 5PX28AWG On the other end of the cable use the type of connector and connector
295. umbwheel Type Ver 5 Direct Connection Only 142 When using an NT 20S ST121 EV3 ST122 V1 with Ver 5 direct connection nu merical values are input directly at the numeral setting input field using touch switches that increment or decrement each of the digits in the display when pressed Each time the displayed numerical value is changed the new displayed value is written to the numeral memory table and simultaneously notified to the host This means that when using the Thumbwheel type of numeral setting all that is required to input numerical values is to create the numeral setting input field on the screen Pressing the key decrements the digit by one MUS Notification Numeral memory table Each time a or key is pressed the input value is written to the numeral memory Pressing the key table and simultaneously notified to the hos increments the digit by one Numeral Setting Section 4 8 4 8 3 Creating Numeric Keys Setting Screen Attributes In order to input numerical values using the numeral setting function apart from the display area for the numeral setting the numeric keys must also be created The type of numeric keys can be selected using the numeral setting attributes of the screen attributes There are two numeral setting attributes system and user e Screen when system is specified When a numeral setting area is created numeric keys are automatically dis played
296. umerical val ues Values can be copied from one memory table to another of the same type by using the Copy Memory Table Command Reference Whenthecontents of an NT20S numeral memory table are changed by numeral setting input a Number Input Notify Command is automatically sent from the NT20S refer to page 212 e By creating a bar graph screen and arranging for it to refer to a particular numeral memory table the display contents of the bar graph can be updated by changing the contents of the numeral table Write Character string Memory Table Format ESC B ny n2 d d2 Cy C2 C3 Cn n n Character string length as a number of normal characters 2 digit hexade cimal 01 to 20y 1 to 32 did Character string memory table address of write destination 2 digit hexa decimal 00 to 7Fy 0 to 127 C4C2C3 to c Character string data 205 Memory Tables Section 6 3 Description Writes the character string data to the character string memory table The character string data can contain a mixture of normal alphanumeric charac ters and marks When determining the character string length count each mark as two normal characters A Caution If the actual character string is longer than the specified character string length the specified number of characters is written and the remainder are discarded A timeout error message is displayed if the actual character string is shorter t
297. umerical values at the PC side refer to Notification of Numbers to the PC on page 188 and Number Input Notify on page 212 Numeral settings are set during screen creation with the support tool Confirm system safety carefully before changing monitor data 4 8 1 The Numeral Setting Function Basic Procedure 140 The numeral setting function is described below The procedure for numeral setting is as follows 1 Input the numerical value at the touch panel 2 The input numerical value is displayed in the numeral setting area on the screen 3 Confirm the input numerical value it will be written to the numeral memory table and simultaneously notified to the PC Numeral setting NT20S Write Notification pene Numeral memory table Touch switch Numeral Setting Section 4 8 Restrictions on Numerical Value Input and Attribute Setting Numerical values of up to 8 digits 7 if there is a minus sign can be input in either decimal or hexadecimal format e Decimal input When the display attribute is set for decimal display values are input in the deci mal format Numerical value range The range for numerical values that can be input differs according to whether or not there is a sign display When there is no sign display 0 to 99999999 8 digits When there is a sign display _ 9999999 to 99999999 7 digits for negative numbers 8 digits for positive numbers If a sign is displayed when us
298. upport an installation that will remain secure and strong 1 Open a hole shown below in the panel and install the NT20S from the front side of the panel E 100 5 mm E gt 2 Attach the panel fittings at four positions shown below on the rear side of the NT20S L 178 5 mm Fit the hook of the fitting in the square hole in the body and tighten the screw with a Phillips head screwdriver while lightly pulling the fitting Note In order to ensure adequate water and dustproof performance tighten the four panel fittings uniformly and make sure there are no gaps between the fittings and the NT20S panel 28 Installation Section 2 2 2 23 Power Supply Connection Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the power input terminals Note Check the wiring carefully before turning on the power e Do not connect an AC power supply to the power supply terminals e Use a DC power supply with low voltage fluctuation e If complying with EC directives low voltage directives use a power supply with reinforced insulation Reference Whenusing an NT20S ST122 V1 the NT20S must be started up before the host For details refer to Switching the Power ON OFF When Using C200H Direct page 62 When not using C200H direct communication there are no restrictions on the order in which power supplies are switched ON and OFF 24 VDC 4 9 a Breaker ETS Power Supply 24 VDC e Power supply The specific
299. when the screen is displayed 125 Memory Tables Section 4 4 4 4 Memory Tables The NT20S has the character string memory table for the character data and the numeral memory table for numeric data which can be written and updated by the PC Host The contents of the memory tables can be set by using the support tool when dis playing the memory tables on the screen or by editing the table 4 4 1 Character String Memory Table The character string memory table is an NT20S internal memory used to store the character data Up to 128 character string memory tables can be used and up to 16 full size characters 32 bytes can be stored in one memory table The charac ter string memory tables at up to 32 positions can be registered in one screen Displaying a Character String The character string memory tables are registered with table numbers O to 127 When creating the screen data by using the support tool set the position on the screen to display a character string and also set a character string number to be displayed When the NT20S is operated the screen displays the contents of the character string memory table When using Ver 5 direct connection itis possibleto display the contents of charac ter string memory tables by specifying their numbers with numeral memory tables indirect specification rather than directly changing the character string memory table contents For details on how to change currently disp
300. wing functions pos sible e Control Notification of display elements e Control Notification of the NT20S status e Screen switching e Ascertaining the number of the screen currently displayed e Memory table operations For details on actual operations refer to Section 5 How to Use the Host Link NT Link 120 Outline of Functions Section 4 2 Communication through RS 232C The NT20S ST128 can communicate with the host through the RS 232C inter face In other words it can receive and send commands through the RS 232C in terface which allows various types of host to utilize the functions of the NT20S e Control Notification of display elements e Control Notification of the NT20S status e Memory table operations e Screen operation e Display Deletion of characters graphics For details on actual operations refer to Section 6 Using the RS 232C Controllable NT20S functions The following NT20S statuses can be controlled e Screen switching Screen is displayed or cleared e Continuous intermittent buzzer Buzzer operation is started or stopped e Back light mode Back light is lit or made to flash For details on how these NT20S functions are actually controlled refer to Section 5 4 NT20S Status Control on page 191 Screen Display Control on page 215 and Buzzer Control on page 215 Ascertainable operating statuses of the NT20S A Caution The following operating statuses of the NT20
301. x M Special Characters for details e The character string is displayed according to the enlargement and display at tributes set with commands Reference The character string continues on the next line if it cannot fit into a single line Set the position where the character string is displayed with the Set Cursor Posi tion Command refer to 6 6 Set Cursor Position 220 Terminal Commands Section 6 6 Draw Polyline Format ESC 7 my mo x04 x00 x03 yO yOo yO3 Ss i i 1B 37 ok ok ok OK ok ok ok EE xn xno xng yn yn yng il my M2 Number of lines to draw 2 digit hexadecimal 01 to 28y 1 to 40 x04x02x03 to xnyxn2xn3 X coordinates of line end points 3 digit BCD 000 to 255 y0 y0 gt y03 to ynyyn gt 2yn3 Y coordinates of line end points 3 digit BCD 000 to 127 Description Draws the specified number of lines between the specified points Draw Circle Format ESC 8 X1 X2 X3 y y2 y3 y ra r3 1T il X1X2X3 X coordinate of circle center 3 digit BCD 000 to 255 Yiy2y3 Y coordinate of circle center 3 digit BCD 000 to 127 r4r2r3 circle radius in dots 3 digit BCD 001 to 063 Description Draws a circle of the specified radius around the circle center point 221 Key to Programs Section 6 7 6 7 Key to Programs The following programs include all the commands that can be used with the N
302. xit touch switch The NT20S will enter the 1 0 CHECK MENU 101 System Maintenance Section 3 9 Checking the Communications with the Host NT20S ST128 Execute a NT20S to Host communication check by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select I O Check MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Select Comm Check 1 0 CHECK MENU Quit _ LCD Display LED Check Comm Check Buzzer Touch Switch Data Memory Select RS 232C I F COMM CHECK MENU Quit Tool I F RS 232C I F 102 System Maintenance Section 3 9 The data received from the con RS 232C I F INPUT CHECK nected Host are displayed in hexadecimal numbers When the check is finished press the EXIT touch switch The NT20S will enter the RUN mode Checking the LCD Check the NT20S LCD by using the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Select I O Check MAINTENANCE MENU Quit DIP SW Status PT Setting I O Check Init Memory Memory Switch Sel
303. y Section 4 3 Continuous Screens Example overlapping screen Screen 10 1 This is an Screen 8 Screen 7 This is an lt _ 2 f overlapping Kk overlapping screen lt _ Screen 25 3 screen e Parent screen 8 e Child screens 10 7 and 25 When screen 8 is designated screen 8 becomes the parent screen and the child screens 10 7 and 25 are displayed over the parent screen in that order Only one numeral setting screen which allows numeric values to be set on the NT20S screen can be registered as a child screen For the numeral setting referto Section 4 8 Numeral Setting page 140 Make sure that the touch switches and numbers set in the normal screens do not overlap in an overlapping screen If the set positions of the touch switches and or numbers in the normal screens overlap with each other such settings may some times not be effective as intended Use the support tool and make sure that the set positions do not overlap with each other Agroup of normal screens which are related in series and can be switched consec utively is called the continuous screens Up to eight screens can be registered to one screen as a group of continuous screens The base screen used for registering the continuous screens is called a parent screen and the registered continuous screens are called child screens The current screen numb
304. y attribute so that all characters and marks sent subse quently are not flashing Other attributes remain unchanged The flashing display attribute is set with the Set Flashing Display Command The setting with this command remains valid until the screen display is switched or another display attribute setting is made The default display attributes are set toa normal display when a screen is initially displayed 219 Terminal Commands Section 6 6 Set Cursor Position Format ESC X1 X2 X3 y y2 y3 il X1X2X3 X coordinate 3 digit BCD 000 to 255 YiY2 3 Y coordinate 3 digit BCD 000 to 127 Description Before displaying a character string with the Terminal commands use this com mand to set the bottom left point of the first character to be displayed Reference The cursor position set with this command is also the bottom left point of the first character displayed if the displayed characters are enlarged Specify Displayed Characters Format ESC 4 ny No Cy Co C3 cae Ch 1T m 1B 34 e q nin Character string length as a number of normal characters 2 digit hexade cimal 01 to 20H 1 to 32 C4C2C3 to Cn Character string to display Description e The character string is displayed from the cursor position e The character string data can contain a mixture of normal alphanumeric char acters and marks Refer to Appendi
305. y notifies information such as the operating status to the PT status word of the PT status notify area PT PC allocated to the PC memory as shown below Notification of operation mode PT operating status Notification of screen switching Screen switch strobe flag Notification of numerical data upgrade Numeral setting strobe flag e Restrictions on allocating words The PT status notify area PT PC can be allocated to the PC memory areas listed in the following table m foamy O oaan O ox rematar O imermaSpeca ney O arme fe A fen fome ACI fom ANC HR rola O S AR poa Relay O Aaa ey m nko o fp o O OK x NG Since all the CVM1 CV series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the system they cannot be used for applications not related to the system The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type See Appendix L PC Memory Map page 278 of the APPENDIX L for more details Procedure 1 Use the support tool to allocate the PT status notify area PT gt PC to the PC memory 2 Write a PC program to read the PT status word of the PT status notify area and check each bit status 197 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC Section 5 5 e Timing of PT status notify bit notification The contents of the PT status notify area PT PC are written to the PC when ever the status of the NT20S changes during operation Example of PT Status Notify Bit Applicati
306. y to ensure that it is always used in its opti mum condition Cleaning Method If the display is dirty the screen is difficult to see Clean the screen from time to time as follows e In daily cleaning wipe the display with a soft dry cloth e Ifthe soiling cannot be removed with a dry cloth wet the cloth with water wring it out well and wipe the display with it e If rubber or vinyl products tape etc are left stuck to the display for long periods they will cause staining If such items are stuck to the display remove them dur ing cleaning Note Never use volatile solvents such as benzene or thinners or dusters Inspection Method In normal environments inspect the NT20S at intervals of between 6 months and ayear In environments that are extremely hot and humid or very dusty environ ments shorten the inspection interval Items required for the inspection Prepare the following items before starting the inspection The tools supplied with the NT20S Screwdrivers Philips flat head Tester or digital voltmeter Industrial alcohol 100 cotton cloth Hygrometer required in some cases Thermometer required in some cases Synchroscope required in some cases Pen writing oscilloscope required in some cases 241 Inspection and Cleaning Section 7 4 e Points inspected Inspect the following points to determine if there is any divergence from the stated criteria If there is either improve the surrounding

NT20S

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents